Sie sind auf Seite 1von 296

Return

to Menu

Part No. N0027146 X.X


January 14, 2005

BCM50

Device Configuration Guide


2

Copyright © 2005 Nortel Networks


All rights reserved.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. The statements, configurations, technical data, and
recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable, but are presented without express or implied
warranty. Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document. The
information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks NA Inc.

Trademarks
NORTEL NETWORKS is a trademark of Nortel Networks.
Microsoft, MS, MS-DOS, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Symbol, Spectrum24, and NetVision are registered trademarks of Symbol Technologies, Inc.
All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

N0027146
3

Contents

Figures 9

Global telephony settings 17


Feature Settings 18
Business Name 19
Feature Settings 19
Answer DN answer key levels 22
Timers 23
Advanced Feature Settings 25
System Wide Call Appearances 25
ONN Blocking codes (North American systems) 27
Silent Monitor 28
Reset logs 29

Telephony system and device programming 31

Configuring system speed dial numbers 33


System Speed dial panel 33

System schedule settings and services scheduling 37


Configuring schedule names and timers 38
Configuring scheduled service 40

Creating ring groups 43


Ring Groups - Members 44
Ring Groups - Line Settings 45

Configuring Hunt Groups 49


Hunt Groups system setup 50
Configuring the Hunt group general settings 52

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


4
Contents

Hunt Group members and lines 53

Configuring Hospitality services 55


Hospitality - General 55
Hospitality - Rooms 58
Setting up your hospitality system 59

Monitoring Hunt groups 61


Monitoring individual calls 61
Viewing Hunt group metrics 63

Configuring telephones: Analog devices 67


Analog device DN record overview 68
Configuring an analog telephone 69

Configuring telephones: Digital telephones 71


Digital telephone DN record overview 72
Prerequisites 72
Using the DN panels 73
System DNs - Line Access tab 73
Job aid: Notes about assigning lines to telephones 73
Line Assignment and Line Pools 76
Job aid: Answer DN notes 77
Configuring Capabilities & Preferences 78
Job aid: Assigning intercom (I/C) buttons (keys) 78
Configuring telephone capabilities 79
Job aid: Line redirection notes 80
Configuring preferences 82
Job aid: Call log notes 82
Telephone memory button programming 83
Job aid: Notes about button programming 84
User speed dials 84
Outgoing call restrictions 85

Common procedures: copying and renumbering DNs 87


Copying settings to other DNs 87
Renumbering DNs 88

DN records parameters 91
Main panel tabs: common fields 93
Line Access tab 93
Line Access - Line Assignment tab 96
Line Access - Line Pool Access tab 98

N0027146 [Publish Date]


5
Contents

Line Access - Answer DNs tab 99


Capabilities and Preferences main tab 100
Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities tab 102
Capabilities and Preferences - Preferences tab 105
Capabilities and Preferences - ATA settings tab 107
Capabilities and Preferences - IP Terminal Details tab 108
Capabilities and Preferences - Button Programming tabs 109
Capabilities and Preferences - User Speed Dial tab 111
Restrictions main tab 113
Restrictions - Set Restrictions tab 114
Restrictions - Line/Set Restrictions tab 115

Registering Nortel 20XX IP telephones 117


Determining the registration process 117
Registering the telephone to the system 118
Configuring telephone settings 119
Troubleshooting IP telephones 122
Operation issues 123
Deregistering 20XX IP telephones 123

Configuring telephones: IP telephones 125


IP telephone DN record overview 126
Configuring an IP telephone DN record 126

Setting up Central Answering Positions 129


Configuring CAP assignments (eCAPs) 130
Programming CAP/KIM buttons 132
Managing lines on a KIM 132

Installing Nortel IP telephones 133


Before installing 133

T24 Key Indicator Module


(KIM) Installation Card 135
T24 KIM initialization 136
T24 KIM coldstarts 136

Default memory button programming for telephones 139


Rules of default button assignment 139
7316E digital phone button defaults 141
7316 digital phone button defaults 143
7208 digital phone button defaults 144
Model 7100 digital phone button defaults 145
Model 7000 digital phone button defaults* 145

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


6
Contents

7406 digital phone button defaults 146


IP telephone button defaults 147

Telephony features 153


Features to set up telephone set features 153
Contrast adjustment 154
Select how you dial your calls 154
Language choice 155
Moving line buttons 155
Receiver volume 155
Programming distinctive ringing 156
Ring volume 156

Feature configuration: Answering calls 157


Answering calls directed to your telephone 157
Configuring handsfree and handsfree answerback 158
Answering calls not directed to your telephone 158
Call Queuing 159
Directed Pickup 159
Pickup Group 159
Answer DNs 161
Configuring privacy 162
Do Not Disturb 162
Turn Privacy on or off 164
Intrusion controls 165
Holding calls 165
Using Hold 166
Hold automatically (Auto Hold) 166
Hold a call exclusively 167
Parking or transferring calls 167
Transfer (answered) calls 168
Transfer (unanswered) calls 169
Line redirection 169
Call forward (unanswered) calls 170
Camp-on 172
Call Park 173
Callback 174
Sharing calls by parking on SWCA buttons 174
Call information 175
Call Display Information 176
Call Duration Timer 176
Time & date display 176

N0027146 [Publish Date]


7
Contents

Malicious Caller ID (MCID) 177


Call log 177
Logit 179

Using telephones for special features 181


Special feature telephones 181
Hotline telephone 181
Control telephone 182
Supervisor telephone for silent monitoring 183
Hospitality services telephones 184
Setting up a central reception point 184
Central Answering point overview 185
Prime telephone 186
Direct dial telephone 186
Creating an enhanced CAP station 186
Hunt groups 188
Ringing groups 189

Display prompts and messages 191


Common display prompts 192
Viewing active services 205
Call log prompts 205
Report and record alarm codes 206

Feature configuration: Making calls 209


Blocking user access to feature programming 209
Protecting outgoing call privacy 210
Deal with a busy signal on an internal call 210
Priority Call 210
Ring Again 211
Other ways of communicating with internal users 211
Leaving a message 211
Paging 212
Making announcements to individuals (Voice Call) 214
Create a conference call 215
Dialing shortcuts 217
Last Number Redial 217
Saved Number Redial 218
Autodial 219
Speed dialing 219
Programming memory buttons 220

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


8
Contents

Global IP features 223


IP features list 223
IP telephone feature display labels 225
Defining a key label 226
Hot desking IP telephone configurations 227
Using the hot desking feature 228
Configuring a new time zone on a remote IP telephone 230
Download firmware to a Nortel 20XX IP telephone 231

Setting up auxiliary features 233


Background music 234
Auxiliary ringer 234
BST Doorphone 234

Relocating telephones 235


Moving digital telephones 236
Moving IP telephones 237
User card list 238

Defining region-based defaults 239


Region-based system settings 239
Core software and regions 240
Languages 240
Caller ID displays 242
Companding Law by region 242
Media bay module availability by region 243
FEM(no longer supported)-trunk module combinations by region 244
PRI line protocol support, by region 245
Supported ISDN line services 246
Defining time zones by country and language 247
System feature defaults 247
Dialing plan defaults 250
BRI and PRI line types 251
CallPilot regions 253

System features and feature codes 255


BCM50 feature codes 256
Button programming features 260

N0027146 [Publish Date]


9

Figures

Figure 1 Business Name field NEW SCREEN SHOT 19


Figure 2 System feature settings NEW SCREEN SHOT REQ 19
Figure 3 System Timers 24
Figure 4 ONN Blocking codes for Tone, Pulse and BRI trunks 27
Figure 5 Silent Monitor settings 28
Figure 6 System log reset 29
Figure 7 System Speed dial table 34
Figure 8 Schedule names and timers 38
Figure 9 Services table 40
Figure 10 Adding members to ring groups 44
Figure 11 Ring group lines 46
Figure 12 Hunt groups 50
Figure 13 Hunt group Members and Line Assignment tables 53
Figure 14 Hopitality General tab panel 56
Figure 15 Hospitality Rooms tab pane 58
Figure 16 Hunt Group Metrics 63
Figure 17 7316E digital phone display button assignment protocol 74
Figure 18 Adding an intercom button 75
Figure 19 Adding an Answer DN 75
Figure 20 System DNs table 94
Figure 21 Line Access - Line Assignment tabbed panel - Assigned Lines table 96
Figure 22 Line Access - Line Pool Access tab 98
Figure 23 Line Access - Answer DNs tab 99
Figure 24 Capabilities and Preferences table panel 100
Figure 25 Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities tab panel 102
Figure 26 Capabilities and Preferences - Preferences tab panel 105
Figure 27 Capabilities and Preferences - ATA Settings panel fields 107
Figure 28 Capabilities and Preferences - IP Terminal Details panel 108
Figure 29 Button Programming and CAP/KIM Button Programming tabbed panels 109

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


10
Figures

Figure 30 Capabilities and Preferences - User Speed Dial tab 111


Figure 31 Restrictions table panel 113
Figure 32 Restrictions - Set Restrictions tab panel 114
Figure 33 Restrictions - Line/Set Restrictions panel 115
Figure 34 7316E with KIM 130
Figure 35 CAP Assignment panel 131
Figure 36 7316E digital phone lower button mapping 142
Figure 37 7316 digital phone upper button defaults 143
Figure 38 7316 digital phone button assignment 144
Figure 39 7208 digital phone button mapping 144
Figure 40 7000 digital phone button mapping 145
Figure 41 7406 digital phone button defaults 146
Figure 42 2004/2050 default button programming 147
Figure 43 2002 default button assignment 148
Figure 44 2001 default button formatting 148
Figure 45 Feature List tab fields 224
Figure 46 IP telephones Key Labels 226

N0027146 [Publish Date]


11

Tables

Table 1 Feature settings 20


Table 2 DN answer key levels 23
Table 3 Timer values 24
Table 4 SWCA controls 25
Table 5 ONN Blocking values 27
Table 6 Silent monitor system settings 28
Table 7 Silent Monitor system settings 29
Table 8 Release reason values 34
Table 9 Schedule common settings 38
Table 10 Default schedule times 39
Table 11 Service settings 40
Table 12 Ringing group schedule line values 46
Table 13 Hunt group settings 50
Table 14 Hunt group tables 53
Table 15 55
Table 16 Hospitality main settings 56
Table 17 Room settings 58
Table 18 Hunt Group Metrics fields 63
Table 19 Analog telephone customization 69
Table 20 Embark validation error messages 81
Table 21 Copy values 87
Table 22 Common columns for the main tabs 93
Table 23 Line Access - System DNs table fields 94
Table 24 Telephone line assignment fields 96
Table 25 Line Pool Access fields 98
Table 26 Line pool access fields - answer DNs 99
Table 27 Capabilities and Preferences tabbed panel 100
Table 28 Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities panel fields 102
Table 29 Capabilities and Preferences - Preferences panel fields 105

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


12
Tables

Table 30 ATA settings 107


Table 31 Capabilities and Preferences - IP Terminal Details, DN-unique field 108
Table 32 Button programming fields 110
Table 33 Capabilities and Preferences - User Speed Dial panel fields 111
Table 34 Restriction table fields 113
Table 35 Restrictions - Set Restrictions tab fields 114
Table 36 Schedule filter defaults 114
Table 37 Restrictions - Line/Set Restrictions fields 115
Table 38 IP telephone server configurations 120
Table 39 IP telephony display messages 122
Table 40 IP telephone troubleshooting 123
Table 41 Line Configuration 126
Table 42 7316E digital phone upper button defaults 141
Table 43 7316E digital phone lower button defaults 142
Table 44 7316 digital phone lower button defaults 144
Table 45 7208 digital phone button defaults 144
Table 46 7000 digital phone button defaults 145
Table 47 7406 digital phone button defaults 146
Table 48 2004 button defaults 147
Table 49 2002 button defaults 148
Table 50 Call log options 178
Table 51 Hunt group feature operation 188
Table 52 Active services: 205
Table 53 Call log prompts: 205
Table 54 External call codes and definitions 222
Table 1 Feature List tab fields description 224
Table 2 Ringing group schedule line values 226
Table 3 Relabelling examples 227
Table 55 Core software, defined by region and carrier profile 240
Table 56 Languages 240
Table 57 South/Central America language breakout 241
Table 58 Companding law 242
Table 59 Module availability, by profile 243
Table 60 Trunk availability, by region 244
Table 61 PRI line protocol supported, by region 245
Table 62 ISDN line services 246
Table 63 ISDN services, by Protocol 246
Table 64 Time/date formats based on language 247
Table 65 Region defaults 247
Table 66 Default dialing restrictions, by profile 250
Table 67 BRI and PRI line types (DTM and BRI modules) 251
Table 68 CallPilot region default languages by country 253

N0027146 [Publish Date]


13
Tables

Table 69 CallPilot feature default anomalies 254


Table 70 Features sorted by feature name and by activation code 256
Table 71 Button Programming Feature settings 260

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


14
Tables

N0027146 [Publish Date]


15

Section 1
System telephony
This section contains the following topics:

• Telephony system and device programming (page 31)

• Configuring system speed dial numbers (page 33)

• Creating ring groups (page 43)

• Configuring Hunt Groups (page 49)

• System schedule settings and services scheduling (page 37)

• Configuring Hospitality services (page 55)

• Monitoring Hunt groups (page 61)

• Global telephony settings (page 17)

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


16
Section 1: System telephony

N0027146 [Publish Date]


17

Section 1: System telephony

Global telephony settings

There are a number of settings that define telephony operation for the entire system. These have
been gathered on one panel, separated into sections.

Where:

• Element Manager: Configuration//Telephony//Global Settings//Feature Settings

• Telset interface: **CONFIG//System Prgrming

Click on one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view:
Panels and Details Panels Task/Feature config

“Feature Settings” on page 18


“Business Name” on page 19 “Programming Business name display
(outgoing)” in the BCM50 Networking
Configuration Guide
“Feature Settings” on page 19 “Background music” on page 234
“Call Park” on page 173
“Directed Pickup” on page 159
“Holding calls” on page 165
“Transfer (unanswered) calls” on page 169
“Paging” on page 212
“Receiver volume” on page 155
“Answer DNs” on page 161
“Timers” on page 23 “Camp-on” on page 172
“External call codes” on page 221
“Call Park” on page 173
“Callback” on page 174
“Setting the page timeout” on page 213
“Configuring an analog telephone” on page 69

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


18
Section 1: System telephony Global telephony settings

Panels and Details Panels Task/Feature config

“Advanced Feature Settings” on page 25


“Sharing calls by parking on SWCA buttons” on
page 174
“ONN Blocking codes (North American systems)” “Blocking outgoing name display at the
on page 27 telephone” in the BCM50 Networking
Configuration Guide
“Silent Monitor” on page 28 “Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities tab”
on page 102 (Supervisor sets)
“Monitoring individual calls” on page 61
“Reset logs” on page 29 “Capabilities and Preferences main tab” on
page 100 (Set log space)
“Call log” on page 177
Click on the navigation tree heading to access general information about user management.

These settings affect a number of different telephony features.

• Business Name: This is part of the CLID feature and displays for outgoing calls for all
telephones in the system which have CLID active, over lines outgoing CLID is allowed.

• Feature settings: Are settings affecting different aspects of how various features act or if they
are allowed on the system.

• Timers provides timeout parameters for different types of telephony features.

• System wide call appearance (SWCA) fields determine how the telephones will relate calls to
SWCA assignments.

• Telco features is another CLID feature. This setting defines special codes that may be required
for outgoing name and number display.

Feature Settings
The following sections describe the fields in each segment of this panel.

• “Business Name” on page 19

• “Feature Settings” on page 19

• “Timers” on page 23

• “System Wide Call Appearances” on page 25

• “ONN Blocking codes (North American systems)” on page 27

N0027146 [Publish Date]


19
Global telephony settings Section 1: System telephony

Business Name

This banner display is part of all outgoing name display information.

Figure 1 Business Name field NEW SCREEN SHOT

The field is described in the table below.

Attribute Value Description

Business Name <Maximum of 8 Enter a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters.


alphanumeric Refer to “Programming Business name display (outgoing)” in the
characters> BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide

Feature Settings

These settings affect all telephones. They determine whether the listed features are allowed, or
how they will function.

Figure 2 System feature settings NEW SCREEN SHOT REQ

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


20
Section 1: System telephony Global telephony settings

Table 1 describes each field.

Table 1 Feature settings

Attribute Value Description

Background music <checkbox> Selecting the checkbox indicates allows you (or the caller?) to listen
to music through your telephone speaker after pressing
FEATURE 86 on your telephone. A music source must be connected
to system. Refer to the hardware installation section for information
about installing an external music source.
Also refer to “Background music” on page 234.
Page tone <checkbox> Selecting the checkbox indicates that a tone sounds before a page
begins. Also refer to “Paging” on page 212.
*Conference Tone Y or N This setting determines whether a conference tone is heard by
participants at the beginning of the conference.
*Not available in all region profiles.
Message reply <checkbox> If selected, it allows you to automatically deactivate the message
enhancement waiting indicator on analog telephones connected to an analog
station media bay module (ASM), if the reply call from the analog
telephone to the direct-dial telephone is answered. It does not matter
where the call is answered from by the user.
This feature also functions if the user invokes the Call pickup feature
to answer the reply call from the analog telephone. It does not,
however, work with the Retrieve parked call feature.
Tips: Direct-dial telephones are the only telephones that can send
messages (using F1) to analog telephones connected to an
ASM/GASM. The direct-dial set must be the designated direct-dial
telephone for the analog telephone receiving a message.
Force auto/spd dial <checkbox> This feature allows you to determine if Auto and Speed dial codes
over ic/conf can be transmitted during an active call. This feature works during
either a one-to-one call, or during a conference call.
If not selected: When the user presses a memory key for a speed
dial, the current call will automatically be put on Hold, and the second
call will be dialed.
If selected: When the user presses a programmed auto dial or speed
dial key, the system dials out the number while maintaining the
current call.
On hold Tones Allows you to choose what a caller hears on an external line when the
Music line is put on hold.
Silence Tones provides a periodic tone.
Music provides any signal from a source such as a radio connected
to BCM50 or streaming audio, using the IP Music feature. See
“Background music” on page 234.
Silence provides no audio feedback.
Held line reminder Immediate Reminds you that an external call at your telephone is still on Hold.
After 30 seconds You periodically hear two tones from your telephone until you take
After 60 seconds the call off Hold.
After 90 seconds Note: These tones can be heard by the caller.
After 120 seconds
After 150 seconds
After 180 seconds
Off

N0027146 [Publish Date]


21
Global telephony settings Section 1: System telephony

Table 1 Feature settings (Continued)

Attribute Value Description

Delayed Ring Transfer Off Defines whether unanswered external calls are automatically
After 1 ring forwarded to a prime telephone after this timer expires.
After 2 rings You must assign a prime telephone for this feature to operate. Refer
After 3 rings to “Properties” in the BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide.
After 4 rings
After 6 rings
After 10 rings
Park mode Lowest Allows you to determine how the system assigns a retrieval code to
Cycle parked calls.
Lowest, the system chooses the lowest code that is available when
the call is parked.
Cycle, the system will choose the codes in a sequence, from lowest
to highest, until all the codes have been used, then start at the lowest
code again.
Also refer to “Common dialing plan settings” in the BCM50
Networking Configuration Guide (Call Park access code) and
“Timers” on page 23 (Park timeout).
Maximum CLI per line 30 (read-only) This setting indicates the maximum number of telephones that will
display CLID simultaneously for an incoming call.
Answer keys Basic The Answer key setting allows you to determine what types of calls
Enhanced alert at a telephone that has answer DNs assigned. Answer key
changes do not apply to portables.
Extended
Warning: Do not change the default setting (Basic) if you have Call
Center active on your system.
Refer to “Answer DN answer key levels” on page 22 for attributes of
each setting.
Also refer to “Line Access - Answer DNs tab” on page 99.
Receiver volume Use sys volume Allows you to specify if the volume level of a receiver or headset
Use set volume returns to the system default level when a call ends or is put on hold,
or if it remains at the volume level set at the individual telephone.
Directed pickup <checkbox> If selected, allows anyone to answer any calls by specifying the
internal number (DN), where the call is ringing.
Directed pickup is useful when not all the telephones have the same
lines, but you want to allow co-workers to answer a call on any
external line.
Note: Do not confuse Directed pickup with the Group pickup feature.
Group pickup allows you to answer a call at any telephone within a
specific group without specifying the internal number (DN) of the
ringing telephone.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


22
Section 1: System telephony Global telephony settings

Table 1 Feature settings (Continued)

Attribute Value Description

Set relocation <checkbox> Selected - Set relocation after you perform the telephone installation
and programming, for more flexibility in testing equipment. This
allows you to move any digital telephone to a new location without
losing the directory number, autodial settings, personal speed dial
codes, and any programming for that telephone.

Not selected - Set relocation while moving a telephone, the internal


number and programming data remain with the physical port on
BCM50. When you connect the telephone somewhere else, it does
not receive the original programming. A telephone that is plugged into
the original jack would download the programming. If the new
telephone is a different model, it would download that part of the
programming that is the same for both models.
Also refer to “Moving digital telephones” on page 236.
Alarm set None Allows you to assign a device on which alarm messages appear
DN: <number> when a problem has been detected in the system. Alarms are
recorded in the event log.

Answer DN answer key levels

You can determine what type of calls alert at an assigned Answer DN key. This is a system setting,
so all Answer DNs will behave the same.

There are three levels, Basic, Enhanced, and Extended. If your system supports overflow routing
of calls (Hunt groups, for instance), the setting will be at Enhanced or Extended. On the other
hand, if Call Center telephones have assigned Answer DNs, this setting must be set to Basic. Do
not change this setting unless you understand the impact on the other telephone groups in your
system.

In Table 2, the X indicates the type of calls that are handled at Answer DNs for each Answer key
level.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


23
Global telephony settings Section 1: System telephony

Table 2 DN answer key levels

Answer DN call response for: Basic Enhanced Extended

Prime set call capture X


Overflow call routing calls X X
Call forwarded calls X
Ringing service calls X
Callbacks X
Blind transferred calls X X
Other answer key calls
Priority calls
Voice calls
All other calls X X X

Also refer to:


• “Line Access - Answer DNs tab” on page 99

• “Telephony features” on page 153

Timers

Various system features require timeout parameters to close the feature.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


24
Section 1: System telephony Global telephony settings

Figure 3 System Timers

Table 3 describes the timers.

Table 3 Timer values

Attribute Values Description

Camp timeout 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150, Assign the number of seconds before an unanswered camped call returns
or 180 seconds to the telephone that camped the call. Also refer to “Camp-on” on
page 172.
Park timeout 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150, Assign the number of seconds before a parked call on an external line
180, 300, or returns to the telephone which parked the call. This interval is used for
600 seconds SWCA lines as well. Also refer to “Call Park codes” in the BCM50
Networking Configuration Guide.
Page timeout 15, 30, 60, 120, 180, Define the period of time after which the paging feature automatically
300, 600, or 2700 disconnects. Also refer to “Paging” on page 212.
seconds
Transfer Off Specify the number of rings before a callback occurs on a transferred call.
callback after 3 rings You can estimate the delay in seconds if you multiply the number of rings
timeout after 4 rings by six.
after 5 rings Note: This setting can affect transferred calls from voice mail and should
after 6 rings be configured accordingly.
after 12 rings
Also refer to “Line Access tab” on page 93 (Call forward).
*Network <XX seconds> This timeout value determines when a transfer attempt will stop and then
Callback attempt a retry of the transfer.
*Not available in all region profiles.
Host delay 200, 400, 600, 800, Assign the delay between the moment an outgoing line is selected to
1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, make an external call (for example, by lifting the receiver off the telephone)
1800 or 2000 and the moment that BCM50 sends dialed digits or codes on the line.This
milliseconds ensures that a dial tone is present before the dialing sequence is sent.
Minimizing this delay provides faster access to the requested features.
Link time 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, Specify the duration of a signal required to access a feature through a
600, 700, 800, 900, or remote system.
1000 milliseconds The Link time depends on the requirements of the host switching system.
For example, to program external dialing through a Centrex system
requires a Link time of 400 ms.
Link is another name for recall or flash.
Make/Break Dial Pulse This setting determines how analog or T1 trunks use dial pulse or dial tone
ratio Tone modes.
Dial Pulse mode: Make = low voltage for dial pulse/Break = high voltage
for Dial Pulse.
Tone mode: Make = DTMF tone/Break = silence

N0027146 [Publish Date]


25
Global telephony settings Section 1: System telephony

Advanced Feature Settings

System Wide Call Appearances

There are a number of ways that calls can be parked on system wide call appearance (SWCA)
assignments. Use this panel to set the system feature function.
System Wide Call Appearances controls

Table 4 describes the fields on this panel.

Table 4 SWCA controls

Attribute/Value Description

Auto-associate SWCA key to call Choose how a call will be parked on an SWCA key.
Manually - while parked
Manually - life of call
Automatically - life of call
Manually - while parked: The user either presses a free SWCA key on the
telephone, or dials the feature code for a free key. Once the call is retrieved, it is
unassigned from the SWCA key.
Manually - life of call: The user either presses a free SWCA key on the telephone, or
dials the feature code for a free key. When the call is retrieved, it remains assigned
to the SWCA key. The key is freed only after the call is terminated.
Automatically - life of call: When a call is answered, it will automatically be assigned
to a free SWCA key, starting with the lowest available number. When the call is
retrieved, it remains assigned to the SWCA key. The key is freed when the call is
terminated.
Include I/C calls when auto-associating Decide if you want intercom calls to automatically park on
<checkbox> SWCA keys.

If you select the checkbox...


Auoto-associate SWCA key to call must be set to Automatically - Life of call
for this feature to work.
When the user makes a call using the intercom button, the call automatically
associates with a free SWCA key, and remains assigned for the duration of the
call.
If you do not select the checkbox...
The user must manually assign an intercom call to a SWCA key.
The call will otherwise behave by the rules of the choice made for Associate
SWCA key to call.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


26
Section 1: System telephony Global telephony settings

Table 4 SWCA controls (Continued)

Attribute/Value Description

Invoke SWCA parking by Hold Choose whether calls that are put on hold will automatically
<checkbox> assign to a SWCA key.

If you select the checkbox...


When the user presses Hold, the system attempts to repark the call on the
current SWCA key assigned to the call, or on a free SWCA key programmed on
the telephone.
If no SWCA is currently associated with the call (Automatically - life of call is not
turned on), and there is no free SWCA key to assign to the call, the call remains
on Hold on the line it came in on.
Note: In this case, the call is not available to other telephones in the group until
it can be assigned to a SWCA key or unless they have the same line
appearance as the held call.
If you do not select the checkbox...
There is no interaction with SWCA keys. The call remains on Hold on the line it
came in on and is not available to other telephones in the SWCA group unless
the user manually assigns the call to a SWCA key or unless those telephones
have the same line appearance as the held call.
Include I/C calls when invoking by Hold Choose whether intercom calls put on Hold will automatically
<checkbox> assign to a SWCA key.

If you select the checkbox...


Invoke SWCA parking by Hold must be checked to activate this feature.
When the user makes an intercom call, and puts it on Hold, the call works the
same ways as described in Invoke SWCA parking by Hold, selected.
If you do not select the checkbox...
Intercom calls will be held on the local line, regardless of whether you select the
Invoke SWCA parking by Hold.
If the intercom call was assigned to a SWCA key automatically, you can press
the SWCA key to repark the call and make it available to other telephones in the
group.
If you manually assign the intercom call to a SWCA key, the call is automatically
parked, and it becomes available to the rest of the group.

Also refer to:


• Common dialing plan settings in the BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide (Call Park codes)

• Timers (Park timeout)

• “Sharing calls by parking on SWCA buttons” on page 174.

• About System Wide Call Appearance (SWCA) keys user card

N0027146 [Publish Date]


27
Global telephony settings Section 1: System telephony

ONN Blocking codes (North American systems)

The outgoing name and number blocking codes for Analog and BRI lines may vary between
service providers. This panel allows you to enter the code they provide, so that this feature works
correctly over the network.

Figure 4 ONN Blocking codes for Tone, Pulse and BRI trunks

capture from telephony/glob/advfeaset

Table 5 describes these trunks.

Table 5 ONN Blocking values

Attribute Values Description

Tone <feature digits> Specify a code that allows users to block outgoing name and number
display over an analog tone line.
Pulse <feature digits> Specify a code that allows users to block outgoing name and number
display over an analog pulse line.
BRI <feature digits> Specify a code that allows users to block outgoing name and number
display over a BRI trunk.

Also refer to:


• “Blocking outgoing name display at the telephone” in the BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide

• “Protecting outgoing call privacy” on page 210.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


28
Section 1: System telephony Global telephony settings

Silent Monitor

The features in this box provide the parameters that determine how you can use supervisor
terminals on your system to monitor Hunt group members (“Monitoring individual calls” on
page 61) or Call Center agents.

Figure 5 Silent Monitor settings

Table 6 describes the fields in this box.


Table 6 Silent monitor system settings

Field Values Description

Monitoring mode Silent Choose Silent if you want supervisors to be able to break into
Non silent a hunt group conversation without giving an indicator of their
presence.
Choose Non silent if you want the hunt group member and
the caller to hear a conference tone when a supervisor
breaks into a hunt group conversation.
Note: Initial monitoring is muted at the supervisor set. If the
supervisor wants to speak within the conversation, a display
key on the two-line display becomes available, once the
connection is established.
The default changes based on country profile.
Number of SM sets 1 to 30 Indicate the number of two-line telephones in your system
that you will allow to be used as supervisory telephones.
(Default: 5)
SM password XXXXXX Enter a six-digit password that must be entered after the
supervisor presses FEATURE *550. To maintain system
security, change this password frequently. (Default: 745368
(SILENT))

N0027146 [Publish Date]


29
Global telephony settings Section 1: System telephony

Reset logs

You can reset the log cache on the system by using the button defined in this section.

Figure 6 System log reset

Table 7 describes the fields in this box.


Table 7 Silent Monitor system settings

Field Values Description

Reset Logs button Opens Reset Call Log Space dialog box.
Reset Call Log Space dialog box
Space per log <digits> Enter amount of space each telephone that supports logs
has.
# of sets with logs <digits> Indicate the number of telephones that will create call logging.

Also refer to:


• Monitoring Hunt groups on page 61

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


30
Section 1: System telephony Global telephony settings

N0027146 [Publish Date]


3

Section 1: System telephony

Telephony system and device programming

This section provides links to the telephone and telephony system programming areas of the
system.

Within the context of the network, system telephones act as call end points or call initiation
devices.
• To make or receive calls, telephones must be set up with the correct line assignments.
• To make calls, users must know the correct routing codes and dial strings to reach other
internal or external devices.

Refer to the BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide for connections to the sections that describe
line setup and numbering plans.

How telephones handle incoming and outgoing call traffic is determined by telephone features.
Some telephone features are set up for the entire system, while other parameters are configured on
a per-device basis.

• System-wide telephony feature configuration


The system telephony settings must be set correctly to ensure that telephones can be
programmed correctly.
— “Global telephony settings” on page 17

• Telephone record configuration


Once the system features are determined, the telephone DN records then allow you to refine
how each of telephone interacts with the system. DN record configuration can depend on what
features you want the user to have access to, or what features the type of telephone can
support.
— “DN records parameters” on page 91
— “Common procedures: copying and renumbering DNs” on page 87
— “Configuring telephones: Digital telephones” on page 71
— “Configuring telephones: Analog devices” on page 67

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


32 Telephony system and device programming Section 1: System telephony

— “DN records: ISDN devices” in the BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide


— “Configuring telephones: IP telephones” on page 125
— “Download firmware to a Nortel 20XX IP telephone” on page 231

• Optional system features:


There are also several optional telephony system features that you can use to enhance the
telephone system.
— “Configuring system speed dial numbers” on page 33
— “Creating ring groups” on page 43
— “System schedule settings and services scheduling” on page 37
— “Configuring Hunt Groups” on page 49
— “Configuring Hunt Groups” on page 49
— “Configuring Hospitality services” on page 55
— Voice mail, if applicable

Also refer to “Telephony features” on page 153.

N0027146
33

Section 1: System telephony

Configuring system speed dial numbers

System speed dial codes can be assigned to external numbers. You can then use the two- or
three-digit code to dial the number, or assign the code to a memory button, instead of dialing the
entire string. These assignments are the same for all users in the system.

Where:

• Element Manager: Telephony//Global Settings//System Speed Dial

• Telset interface: **CONFIG//System Speed dials

Panels/Subpanels Tasks/features

“System Speed dial panel” on page 33 “Using alpha tagging for name display (incoming)” in the
BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide
“Capabilities and Preferences - Button Programming tabs” on
page 109
“Programming memory buttons” on page 220
“Speed dialing” on page 219

Click on the navigation tree heading to access general information about Hospitality services.

System Speed dial panel


This panel allows you to determine the number of system speed dials on the system and what each
code dials.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


34
Section 1: System telephony Configuring system speed dial numbers

Figure 1 System Speed dial table

Table 8 describes each field on this panel.


Table 1 Release reason values

Attribute Values Description

Number of Speed 72 Choose the number of speed dial codes you want available to your
Dials 255 system users.
If you are using alpha tagging, you may need to choose the larger
list to accommodate your incoming call requirements.
Also refer to “Using alpha tagging for name display (incoming)”
BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide
CLID Match Length 1 - 8 Default: 8
Indicate the number of digits, starting from the right of the dial
string, that the system will need to match between an incoming call
and a system speed dial listing to prompt the alpha-tagging display.
When a match is made, the system provides a name and/or number
display for any calls coming in over analog lines that allow number
CLID.
Also refer to “Using alpha tagging for name display (incoming)”
BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide

Speed dial table:

Speed Dial <001-072 or 001-255> The dial codes for the system speed dial list.
Number
Name <alphanumeric> Enter a descriptive name for the owner or business code dials.
Note: For alphatagging, this is the name that the system displays if
there is a number match with an incoming call.
External Number <dial string (max. 24 This is the number the system dials when the code is entered.
digits)> Remember to include required routing codes,

N0027146 [Publish Date]


35
Configuring system speed dial numbers Section 1: System telephony

Table 1 Release reason values (Continued)

Facility Use prime line Select the route you want the dialed number to take out of your
Use line: system.
Pool code Note: Any lines or pool codes that you specify must be assigned to
the telephone where the code is entered.
Use routing table If you choose prime line, a prime line must be assigned to the
telephone where the code is entered.
Refer to “Line Access tab” on page 93.
Display Digits/ Digits, Name Digits = the speed dial number displays
Name Name = the first 16 characters of the name defined for the speed
dial displays
Bypass restrictions <check box> no longer Disabled = the dialed number will use the line and set restrictions
checkbox, got N/A Enabled = the dialed number will bypass any line and set
restrictions

Notes about the system speed dial list

The following section provides some general notes about using the system speed dial panel.

Choose the size of the speed dial list


• The default list consists of 70 speed dial codes from 01 to 70.

• If you set Number of speed dials to 255, the codes are 001 to 255.
If you want to use alpha tagging (see “Using alpha tagging for name display (incoming)”
BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide), you may need to increase the number of codes to allow
for more matching possibilities for incoming calls.

Working with speed dial list entries

To add, change or delete System Speed dial records, click on the field you want to alter and type in
the change required.

Caution: Resource issue:


Entering a large number of system speed dials at one time can impact system performance.
Therefore, it would be best to perform this activity during low-user periods, where
possible.

Next steps:
Speed dial codes can be programmed onto memory keys by the installer during button
programming. Refer to “Capabilities and Preferences - Button Programming tabs” on page 109.
Also, each user can assign speed dial codes to memory buttons directly on the telephone. Refer to
the “Programming memory buttons” on page 220 for instructions about using memory keys.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


36
Section 1: System telephony Configuring system speed dial numbers

For information about using speed dials and for programming speed dial codes at the telephone,
refer to “Speed dialing” on page 219.

Ensure that you publish a list of system speed dial codes for the users. The Programming Records
( **session save selected data) allow you to keep a record of these codes.

Also refer to:


• User speed dials on page 84

N0027146 [Publish Date]


37

Section 1: System telephony

System schedule settings and services scheduling

Use scheduled services to control how calls are answered in off-hours (Ringing Groups), how calls
are routed at various times of the day, and how restrictions are applied on lines and telephones at
specific times of the day.

Where:

• Element Manager: Telephony//Scheduled Services

• Telset interface: **CONFIG//Services

The Scheduled Services - Settings and Schedules panel has two distinct areas for configuration.

• The table in the top frame allows you to determine which schedules will be active for the
system for routing, restriction and ringing schedules.

• The table in the bottom frame allows you to rename schedules and set the time periods within
each schedule for each day of the week.

Click on one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view:

Panels Related panels or tasks Feature

“Configuring scheduled service” on “Alternate routes for routing “Control telephone” on page 182
page 40 schedules” in the BCM50 Networking
Configuration Guide
“Configuring schedule names and “Ring Groups - Line Settings” on
timers” on page 38 page 45
“Restriction Filters” in the BCM50
Networking Configuration Guide
“Restrictions (Line & Remote)” in the
BCM50 Networking Configuration
Guide
“Restrictions main tab” on page 113

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


38
Section 1: System telephony System schedule settings and services scheduling

Panels Related panels or tasks Feature

“Class of Service table” in the BCM50


Networking Configuration Guide
Click on the navigation tree heading to access general information about Ring Group management.

Schedules are activated and deactivated through control telephones. Refer to “Control telephone”
on page 182.

Restriction and Routing services require a service control password before users are allowed to
change scheduling on a control telephone. The Service Control Password field on this panel allows
you to delete a current entry and add a new password. Make a note of the password, because the
panel only displays asterisks.

Configuring schedule names and timers


The tables on this panel allow you to change the names of the schedules and to determine when the
schedules that are set to automatically execute will be deployed. Any changes to these settings
affect all services that use schedules.

Figure 1 Schedule names and timers

Table 9 describes the fields on the subpanel tables.


Table 1 Schedule common settings

Attribute Value Description

Schedule table

Schedule <alphanumeric> Double click on the field and enter a descriptive name for the schedule.

Schedule Times

N0027146 [Publish Date]


39
System schedule settings and services scheduling Section 1: System telephony

Table 1 Schedule common settings

Attribute Value Description

For each schedule, there are timers for the seven days of the week.
Day <seven days>
Start Time 00:00 to 12:00 This is the time when the schedule will start, and any previously-running
a.m.-p.m./24:00 schedules will stop.
Use a 12-hour or 24-hour format. If the entry is less than 12:00, the system will
prompt for a day period setting.
00:00 = the schedule is off
start and stop are the same = schedule runs for 24 hours
start: 22:00/stop: 06:00 = schedule starts at midnight, runs until 6 a.m., then
starts again at 10 p.m. (22:00).
Stop Time 00:00 to 12:00 This is the time when the schedule will stop.
a.m.-p.m./24:00

Default time settings

Table 10 provides a list of the default times for each schedule.

Table 2 Default schedule times

Schedule Start Time Stop Time Schedule Start Time Stop Time
Schedule 1: Night 23:00 07:00 Schedule 4: 00:00 00:00
Schedule 2: Evening 17:00 23:00 Schedule 5: 00:00 00:00
Schedule 3: Lunch 12:00 13:00 Schedule 6: 00:00 00:00

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


40
Section 1: System telephony System schedule settings and services scheduling

Configuring scheduled service


The table in the top frame lists all the schedules that are available on the system. Configure the
settings for the schedules that you are using for your system.

Figure 2 Services table

Table 11 describes the fields under Scheduled Services.


Table 3 Service settings

Attribute Value Description

Service control <alphanumeric> Restriction and Routing schedules require the user to enter a password on the
password control telephone before scheduling can be changed.
If you forget the password, enter a new password.
Schedule <read-only> These are the schedules that are available on the system.
Routing Svc Off Off prevents the service from being activated.
Auto Auto allows you to program a stop and start time for a service under the
Manual Common Settings heading. These times are then automatically executed when
the service is active.
first second third Manual allows you to turn the service on and off at any time from a control
telephone. This setting overrides any automatically-running schedules.
Overflow <check box> If all the lines used by a route are busy when a call is made, you can program
Routing service to overflow to the route used for normal mode. If this happens,
the telephone sounds a warning tone and displays the message Expensive
true/false - new route. The caller can then release the call to avoid the toll charges, or continue.
screen shot
TIPS:
A schedule must be active for overflow routing to be in effect. Overflow routing is
not available in normal mode.
You must create an overflow route to be used with each routing code. In this
way, every route used with a scheduled mode that has overflow service must
have an alternate route in normal service.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


41
System schedule settings and services scheduling Section 1: System telephony

Table 3 Service settings (Continued)

Attribute Value Description

Ringing Svc Off Off prevents the service from being activated.
Auto Auto allows you to program a stop and start time for a service under the
Manual Common Settings heading. These times are then automatically executed when
the service is active.
Manual allows you to turn the service on and off at any time from a control
telephone. This setting overrides any automatically-running schedules.
For details about setting up ring groups, refer to “Creating ring groups” on
page 43.
Trunk answer <check box> Trunk answer allows you to answer, from any telephone, an external call that is
true/false - new ringing at another telephone in your office if the Ringing Service is active on that
screen shot line at the time of the call. If the service is not active, you cannot answer the call.
This is useful if the other telephones are not assigned the same lines as the
telephone you are using to answer the call.
Note: You can change the Trunk Answer setting only if Ringing service is set to
Manual or Automatic.
Extra dial set None The Extra dial set attribute allows you to assign an additional telephone to
DN <XX> receive calls for each schedule.
DN <control set> Note: The extra dial set is activated during a schedule by entering the Ringing
service feature code from the assigned direct-dial telephone. This does not
activate the Ringing service unless the direct-dial telephone is also a control set.
Doorphone note: Ensure that this DN does not belong to a doorphone.
Restriction Svc Off Off prevents the service from being activated.
Auto Auto allows you to program a stop and start time for a service under the
Manual Common Settings heading. These times are then automatically executed when
the service is active.
Manual allows you to turn the service on and off at any time from a control
telephone. This setting overrides any automatically-running schedules.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


42
Section 1: System telephony System schedule settings and services scheduling

N0027146 [Publish Date]


43

Section 1: System telephony

Creating ring groups

Assigning telephones to ringing groups provides a way to ensure that all calls have a way of
getting answered, regardless of the time of day or day of the week. The most common use of this
feature is when a security desk telephone rings for incoming lines after 5:00 p.m., a practice often
called night service.

Where:

• Element Manager: Configuration//Telephony//Ring Groups

• Set-based admin: **CONFIG//Services//Ringing service//Ringing Groups

Click on one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view:

Panels Tasks/Features

“Ring Groups - Members” on page 44 “Configuring scheduled service” on page 40


“Ring Groups - Line Settings” on page 45
Click on the navigation tree heading to access general information about Ring Group management.

Each non-auto-answer line and target line can be assigned a ringing group for each schedule. If no
schedule is set for ringing services, lines ring at any telephones that have the lines assigned.

Note: VoIP trunking lines and PRI lines are automatically set to auto answer
and, therefore, require target lines. BRI lines that are set to auto answer also
ring at target lines. Therefore, by specifying target lines in a ring group, all
auto answer lines can be forwarded to the telephone(s) indicated.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


44
Section 1: System telephony Creating ring groups

Ring Groups - Members


The Ring Groups table on the Group Membership tab in the top panel of this panel is a read-only
list of the 100 ring groups available to the system.

When you click on a ring group in the table, the Members table appears in the bottom panel.

The Group Membership panel allows you to define which telephones belong to each ring group. A
DN can be associated with multiple ring groups.

Figure 1 Adding members to ring groups

The following table describes the fields on this panel.

Attribute Value Description

Ring Groups

Ring Group <read-only> This is a list of the available ring groups for the system.

Members

DN <DN digits> These are the DNs for the telephones that are part of the ringing group selected
in the table in the top frame.

Actions

Add 1. In the top panel, click the ring group where you want to add telephones.
2. Below the Members table, click Add.
3. Add a DN that you want to associate with the ring group.
4. Click OK to save the new members setting.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


45
Creating ring groups Section 1: System telephony

Attribute Value Description


Delete 1. In the top panel, click the ring group where you want to delete telephones.
2. On the Members table, click one or more DNs that you want to delete from the group.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click OK to save the settings.

Ring Groups - Line Settings


The Line Settings tab panel allows you to schedule where calls coming in on a specific line or
target line will ring during a scheduled period.

Where:

• Element Manager: Configuration//Telephony//Ring Groups

• Set-based admin: ???????

There are two panels on this panel:

• The top panel displays all lines that are available for programming as part of the ring group.
This does not include VoIP trunks and PRI lines. For both these types of lines, you would use
target lines. Also, if your DID lines are in a line pool, rather than being assigned individually,
you would also use target lines.

• When you select a line on the top panel, the Lines Settings panel appears in the bottom of the
panel. Use this table to specify schedule settings for each line.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


46
Section 1: System telephony Creating ring groups

Figure 2 Ring group lines

Table 12 describes the headings on both these panels.

Table 1 Ringing group schedule line values

Attribute Value Description

Lines panel:

Line XXX This list includes all analog and digital lines plus the target lines (PRI and
VoIP lines). Program only the ones that are active on the system.

Line Settings panel:

Schedules <read-only> You only need to configure the schedules that you use for your system.
Ring group Ring group <XXX> Type in a ring group number (001-100).
Only one ring group can be assigned to a line for each schedule. To combine
groups of ringing sets, you must create a new ring group which contains all
the sets you want to ring and assign it to the line.
Aux ringer <checkbox>no This variable indicates whether the auxiliary ringer (if installed) also rings
longer checkbox, when Ringing service is on.
true false TIPS:
• The default ringing telephone is 221 (Start DN). This means that all lines
ring at telephone 221 when Ringing service is on.
• If you have an auxiliary ringer programmed to ring for calls on an external
line and you transfer a call on that line without announcing the transfer, the
auxiliary ringer will ring for the call transfer.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


47
Creating ring groups Section 1: System telephony

Also refer to:


• “Configuring scheduled service” on page 40

• “Trunk answer” (user card)

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


48
Section 1: System telephony Creating ring groups

N0027146 [Publish Date]


49

Section 1: System telephony

Configuring Hunt Groups

Hunt Groups panel allows you to set up call groups that are assigned a common hunt group DN for
incoming calls. The calls are then distributed to the member telephones.

Where:

• Element Manager: Configuration//Telephony//Hunt Groups

• Telset interface: **CONFIG//System Progrming//Hunt Groups

Click on one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view:

Panel tabs Tasks

“Hunt Groups system setup” on page 50 “Configuring the Hunt group general settings” on page 52

“Hunt Group members and lines” on page 53 “Monitoring Hunt groups” on page 61

See also: “Programming name display (outgoing)” in the BCM50


Networking Configuration Guide
“Silent Monitor” on page 28

Click on the navigation tree heading to access general information about user management.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


50
Section 1: System telephony Configuring Hunt Groups

Hunt Groups system setup


This main panel shown in Figure 12 lists the hunt groups and the parameters that define hunt group
features.

Figure 1 Hunt groups

Table 13 describes the fields found on the Hunt Groups main panel. Refer to “Configuring the
Hunt group general settings” on page 52 for notes about working with this table.

Table 1 Hunt group settings

Field Values Description

Hunt Group <01-30> This number identifies the hunt group to the system. This is also
the number that is assigned to the telephone, when you add the
telephone as a hunt group member.
Name <alphanumeric> Enter a logical name that describes the group function. This name
also acts as calling line display for outgoing calls.
DN Read-only (625-654) Hunt group DNs begin at 625. This value cannot be altered. This
number can be assigned to memory buttons on telephones that
are not part of the hunt group.
Note: Hunt group DNs cannot be assigned to the module on
7316E+KIM configurations.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


51
Configuring Hunt Groups Section 1: System telephony

Table 1 Hunt group settings (Continued)

Field Values Description

Mode Broadcast Choose how you want the line to present to the group.
Linear Broadcast—simultaneously rings at each non-busy telephone in
Rotary the hunt group. All telephones receiving the call also display the
calling line identification from the line, if the telephone or line has
Default: Broadcast been configured to offer that service. Any of the alerted
telephones can access the call.
Only one call can be presented to a hunt group at a time. Other
calls are queued until the first call is answered. Then the next call
rings on the remaining non-busy telephones. This feature allows
the call load to be continuously spread across the entire member
group.
Linear—rings the first telephone in the hunt group list. If that
telephone is busy, the system continues down the hunt group
priority list until a non-busy telephone takes the call. In this case,
all incoming calls are processed simultaneously and delivered
based on the priority list.
With this feature, you can program your top salesperson to be the
first member of the Hunt group to receive incoming calls.
Rotary—the call starts at the member telephone that appears on
the list after the telephone that answered the last call. If that
telephone is busy, the system proceeds down the priority list until
a non-busy telephone is reached. As many incoming calls can be
processed as there are available telephones to accept the call,
each call being presented in the described round-robin fashion.
Hunt Delay 1-10 (seconds) If Mode is either Sequential or Rotary, Hunt Delay specifies how
much time to delay offering a Queued call to a member telephone
once that telephone becomes available.
This is to provide a break period for the users between calls.
The default is four seconds.
If busy Busy tone Choose how you want the system to respond if all lines appear as
Queue busy.
Overflow Busy tone: If all lines are busy, the user receives a busy tone.
Default: busy tone Queue: If all lines are busy, the user is put on hold for the next
available agent.
Overflow - If all members of the Hunt Group are busy on a call
from that Hunt Group, then route this call to the Hunt Group
overflow DN. Overflow is only available if the overflow DN is
different than the hunt group DN. Refer to the Overflow field,
below.
Queue timeout 15, 30, 45, 60, 120, 180 Choose the time in seconds for a call to remain in the Hunt
(seconds) Group.
Default: 60 This value defines the maximum time a call remains queued, and
the maximum time to offer a call before sending it to overflow if it
is not answered.
If the queue times out before the call connects to a member
telephone, the call is terminated.
If the call has been offered to a member telephone, but is not
answered when the queue times out, the call is rerouted to the
overflow DN.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


52
Section 1: System telephony Configuring Hunt Groups

Table 1 Hunt group settings (Continued)

Field Values Description

Overflow <any system DN> (including This setting determines where unanswered calls are routed after
a Hunt Group DN) the Queue timeout occurs.
Default: hunt group DN If a call gets overflowed back to the same Hunt Group, the call
goes to the bottom of the queue and is treated as a new call.
Answer DNs: A linear hunt group that has defined an overflow
telephone does not support having the overflow telephone
assigned as an Answer DN to any hunt group member. If this
occurs, the Answer DN will not ring at the hunt group telephone
when an overflow condition occurs. Answer DNs are set up under
the Line Access heading for each DN. Refer to “Answer DNs” on
page 161. Answer key must be set to Extended for overflow to
work correctly. Refer to “Answer DN answer key levels” on
page 22.
Use Auxiliary <check box> Defines whether an auxiliary ringer (if installed) rings for incoming
ringer true/false calls to a hunt group (Y).
If set to N, the control of the auxiliary ringer falls back to control
defined on a per telephone or per line basis.
Distinct ring None Select a ring pattern for the hunt group.
Pattern 2, 3 or 4 Default is None.
Warning:
If you assign a distinctive ring pattern for a Hunt Group, all calls offered to telephones in the
group will use the assigned ring pattern. If no pattern is assigned, or if the ring pattern is lower in
status than the ring pattern of the line or the telephone setting, the call will use the ring pattern
with the highest status setting.
Refer to the sections which describe configuring Lines (“Trunk/Line Data, main panel” in the
BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide) and DNs (“Line Access tab” on page 93) for information
about assigning distinctive ring patterns to lines and telephones.

Configuring the Hunt group general settings

When you first set up a Hunt group, you need to identify how a call will be handled among the
group.

Where: Configuration//Telephony//Hunt groups

1 On the Hunt Groups table, select the hunt group you want to configure.
2 Fill our the columns across the table, as required. Refer to the table in the previous section for
details about each field.
Programming note: A linear hunt group DN assigned as the overflow telephone does not
support having the hunt group DN assigned as an Answer DN to any hunt group member. If
this occurs, the Answer DN will not ring at the hunt group telephone when an overflow
condition occurs. If the hunt group DN overflow telephone is assigned as an Answer DN to a
non-group member, ensure that the Answer key for your system is set to extended.
• Use Auxiliary Ringer: If an external ringer is installed, indicate if the hunt group calls will
use it (Y).

N0027146 [Publish Date]


53
Configuring Hunt Groups Section 1: System telephony

• Distinct Ring: Define if incoming hunt calls will have a different ring than other calls
received by the member.
Programming note: If you assign a distinctive ring pattern for a Hunt Group, all calls
offered to telephones in the group will use the assigned ring pattern. If no pattern is
assigned, or if the ring pattern is lower in status than the ring pattern of the line or the
telephone setting, the call will use the ring pattern with the highest status setting.
Refer to the sections which describe configuring Lines and DNs for information about
assigning distinctive ring patterns to lines and telephones.

Hunt Group members and lines


The lower frame of the Hunt Group panel shows a list of DNs that are assigned as members of the
group, and the lines assigned to the hunt group. Need a new screen shot for fig 5.

Figure 2 Hunt group Members and Line Assignment tables

Table 14 describes the fields found on the Details for Hunt Groups tables.
Table 2 Hunt group tables

Field Values Description

Hunt Group members table

Seq. No. <read-only> This is the position of the telephone on the list. This is particularly
important for linear calls, which start at the top of the list and
move sequentially through the list.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


54
Section 1: System telephony Configuring Hunt Groups

Table 2 Hunt group tables (Continued)

Field Values Description

DN <DN> This is the DN of the telephone assigned to this hunt group.


Appearance Type Appear & Ring Choose the setting that suits the telephone and the environment:
Appear Only Appear & Ring: Appears on a button with indicator, which
Ring Only flashes when a call comes in, and it also rings.
Appear Only: Appears on a button with indicator, which flashes
lists first second and third as when a call comes in.
options Ring Only: Telephone rings when a call comes in. (7000 and
7100 digital phones and telephones that have no available
programmable memory buttons with indicators.)

Action

ADD button 1. On the Hunt Groups table, select the group where you want to add members.
2. In the Members box in the lower frame, click the Add button.
3. Enter the DN for the telephone you want to add as a member.
4. Enter an Appearance Type.
Delete 1. On the Hunt Groups table, select the hunt group where you want to delete members.
2. In the Members box in the lower frame, click the DN row to be removed.
3. Click the Delete button located under the Members box.
Up Member order within a Hunt group is important. The member order determines how a call routes
through a Hunt group when the group is set to either linear or rotary mode.
Down
1. Click a member from the member list.
2. Click either the Up or the Down button. The system automatically reorders the list.
Line Assignment
Lines <line #> These are the lines/target lines that are assigned to the hunt
group. Ensure that they are not also assigned to any of the
member telephones.

Action

Add Multiple lines can be assigned to Hunt groups. However, a line can only exist in one Hunt group.
Programming note: Lines assigned to line buttons on individual telephones take precedence
over the lines assigned to Hunt group buttons. Therefore, we recommend that you do not assign
lines to individual telephone DN records for telephones that are part of a Hunt group.
1. On the Hunt Groups table, select the hunt group where you want to add lines.
2. In the Line Assignment box in the lower frame, click the Add button.
3. Enter line numbers.
Delete 1. On the Hunt Groups table, select the hunt group where you want to delete lines.
2. In the Line Assignment box in the lower frame, click the Delete button.
3. Click OK on the confirmation dialog.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


55
Configuring Hospitality services Section 1: System telephony

Configuring Hospitality services

This section describes how to set up the Hospitality services feature.

Where:

• Element Manager: Telephony//Hunt Groups

• Set-based admin: **CONFIG//System Programming//Hunt Groups

These records allow facilities such as hotels, motels, and hospitals to control telephone access to
external lines, to provide alarm clock services on internal telephones, and to monitor room
serviced status:

Table 1

Panels/Subpanels Tasks

See also:
Click on the navigation tree heading to access general information about Hospitality services.

Hospitality - General
The Hospitality - General panel contains the administration programming for the Hospitality
Services feature. The panel is shown in Figure 14. Need new screen shot

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


56
Section 1: System telephony Configuring Hospitality services

Figure 1 Hopitality General tab panel

The Administration heading provides fields that allow you to:

• enter the time when occupied rooms change state from Service done to Service required

• the password that needs to be entered before hospitality features can be changed

• (optional) a password that the room service people need to enter to allow them to indicate
when the room is ready.

! Security Note: Change the desk and room condition passwords regularly.

Table 16 explains the possible settings for the hospitality record.

Table 2 Hospitality main settings

Field Values Description

Administration
Services change time <24 hour digital time> Identify when the occupied rooms
will change from service done to
service required.
Format: HHMM, i.e. 1400 = 2 p.m.
where HH = 0 to 23; MM = 0 to 59

N0027146 [Publish Date]


57
Configuring Hospitality services Section 1: System telephony

Table 2 Hospitality main settings (Continued)

Field Values Description

Desk password <up to six digits> Enter the password that will be
required to access all the
Hospitality administrative features.
Default password: 4677 (HOSP)
Room condition password <up to six digits> Set the password that will allow
access to the Room condition
feature (FEATURE 876).
Default password: None
We strongly recommend that you change the default password, and
frequently change the desk password to prevent unauthorized entry.

Call Restrictions

Vacant filter <two-digit filter #> Enter a code that indicates which
calls are allowed when a room is
empty. (i.e. 911)
Basic filter <two-digit filter #> Enter a code that indicates which
calls are allowed for a basic room
phone. (i.e. 911, and internal calls
only)
Mid filter <two-digit code> Enter a code that indicates which
calls are allowed for a phone with
mid service. (i.e. 911, internal calls,
and 1-800 numbers only)
Full filter <two-digit code> Enter a code that indicates which
calls are allowed for a phone with
full service. (i.e. no restrictions)
Wake-Up Call Settings
Attempts 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Select the number of times the
Alarm time feature attempts to alert
the occupant before cancelling.
Retry interval (in minutes) Select the interval between each
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 attempt to send the alarm.

Alarm duration (in seconds) Select the period that a telephone


10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, alerts for each alarm attempt.
50
Expired Wake-Up Calls Settings
Notify set None/DN: <telephone DN> Enter a telephone DN if you want to
notify a specific telephone when an
alarm expires.
Use tone <check box> Choose whether you want the user
to hear a tone when the alarm
expires.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


58
Section 1: System telephony Configuring Hospitality services

Hospitality - Rooms
The Hospitality - Rooms panel allows you to assign telephones to a room. You can assign a
maximum of five telephone DNs to a room.

Figure 2 Hospitality Rooms tab pane

Table 17 describes the fields in the list on this panel.

Table 3 Room settings

Field Values Description


DN <Read-only> This is the DN of a telephone
assigned to a room.
Name <Read-only> <Read-only>
Model <Read-only> This is the model name from the
DN record.
Room Number <any digit from 1 to 32767> Enter the room that contains the
telephone with this DN.
Requires Desk Password <check box> If set to true, the telephone
true/false - new screen shot requires a password to access
administrative-level hospitality
features (FEATURE 877,
FEATURE 878, or FEATURE
879).
If set to false, the telephone does
not require any passwords to
access the features.
Desk passwords are created using
the main Hospitality command.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


59
Configuring Hospitality services Section 1: System telephony

Setting up your hospitality system


Use the Hospitality panels to set up room telephones, and determine how they will function. Once
the system is set up, you can change settings through the telephone using the Desk password.
Service personnel change the service state of the room using the Room condition password
(optional).

Setting up servicing

1 Decide on a time each day when the telephones will switch to indicate that the rooms require
servicing.
2 In the Services change time field, enter a 24:00 time designator for the service time you chose.
3 In the Requires Desk Password field, change the default password to a one- to six-digit
number. Keep this password in a secure place and change it frequently.
4 If you want the service personnel to enter a password when they dial in to indicate a room has
been serviced, enter a one- to six-digit password into the Room condition password field. This
field can also be left blank.

Setting up call restrictions

1 Decide on what type of calls you want to allow from telephones using the fields in the call
restrictions box.
2 Under Telephony//Call Security// Restriction Filters, create four new restriction filters that
reflect the levels of service you want to allow. For instance, if a room is vacant, you may want
to allow only emergency calls, whereas, in a suite, you might want to allow a full range of call
services.
3 Make a note of the restrictions that you create.
4 On the Hospitality - General screen, in the Call Restrictions box, enter the appropriate filter
numbers beside each field.

Setting up wake-up services

You can set up the room telephones to ring at preset times to act as an automatic wake-up call.

In the Wake-Up Call Settings and Expired Wake-Up Call Settings boxes, determine the following:

1 In the Attempts field, select the number of times the alerter sounds, without the telephone
handset being picked up, before the alarm service automatically cancels.
2 In the Retry interval field, select a time period that the system waits between repeating the
wake-up alerter.
3 In the Alarm duration field, select the length of time the alert sounds each time it repeats.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


60
Section 1: System telephony Configuring Hospitality services

4 In the Notify DN field, enter the DN of an administration telephone, such as the front desk
telephone. When a wake-up call expires at any of the room telephones, an indication appears
on the display of the telephone.
5 If you want a tone to sound, as well, when a wake-up call expires, enable the Use tone check
box.

Assigning a room to a telephone

The Rooms context panel displays all telephones currently connected or registered to the system.

1 Select the telephone DN you want to assign to a room.


2 Click in the Room Number column and enter the room number.
3 Enter true or false beside Requires Desk Password, as required.
Programming note: If you choose true, ensure that a valid desk password exists.

Deleting a room assignment from a telephone

To delete a room assignment, simply, click on the Room Number column and delete the number.

Next step: Using the features

Refer to the Hospitality features user card.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


61

Section 1: System telephony

Monitoring Hunt groups

This section explains the two ways you can monitor hunt group activity.

Tasks:

• Monitor active Hunt group calls (“Monitoring individual calls” on page 61)
• Monitor Hunt group activity (“Viewing Hunt group metrics” on page 63)

Monitoring individual calls


The Silent Monitor feature can be used to monitor individual calls within a hunt group or call
center group. Any two-line display telephone can be assigned as a supervisor telephone to allow
this feature.

There are two places in the Element Manager where the feature is set up:

• silent monitor settings are configured on the Global Settings panel. Refer to “Silent Monitor”
on page 28.

• supervisor terminals are configured on the System DNs record. Refer to “Capabilities and
Preferences - Capabilities tab” on page 102.

On the Set-based Admin tool, the settings are more scattered.

• SM supervisor

• SM password

• DN records, capabilities

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


62
Section 1: System telephony Monitoring Hunt groups

Using silent monitor

Perform the following using a two-line display telephone designated as a supervisor telephone.

1 Enter FEATURE *550.


2 Enter the Silent Monitor password. (Default: SILENT (745368))
3 Enter the DN for the Hunt group member you want to monitor.
If there is an active external Hunt group call occurring at that telephone, you will be
conferenced into the call. Once the session is established, a number of display key prompts
allows the supervisor to silently monitor the call, or break into the call to provide support or
instruction “Common display prompts” on page 192.
4 The display commands under the prompts allow you to use the display keys to break into the
call or exit and move to another DN.

Note: Some countries require that all monitoring use a tone before
monitoring begins.

Monitoring with IP telephones: On calls over an VoIP trunk, where both the Hunt group call and
the monitoring call are from IP telephones (full IP domain calls), the agent will hear a click when
the supervisor starts and ends monitor session.

Also refer to:


• “Configuring Hunt Groups” on page 49

• “Viewing Hunt group metrics” on page 63

N0027146 [Publish Date]


63
Monitoring Hunt groups Section 1: System telephony

Viewing Hunt group metrics


You can also view call activity for all hunt groups on the Hunt Group metrics panel.

Where:

• Element Manager: Administration//Telephony Metrics//Hunt Group Metrics

• Set-based Admin: **CONFIG//Usage Metrics//Hunt Group Metrics

Use Figure 16 to evaluate total call processing by hunt group members.

Figure 1 Hunt Group Metrics

Table 18 describes each field on the panel.

Table 1 Hunt Group Metrics fields

Attribute Value Description

Hunt Group Metrics

Hunt Group <numeric> Number assigned to a specific DN


Name <alphanumeric> Name entered on DN record

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


64
Section 1: System telephony Monitoring Hunt groups

Table 1 Hunt Group Metrics fields

Attribute Value Description

Total calls <numeric> Total number of calls received on specific DN


Answered: Total <numeric> Total number of calls answered
Answered Average % <numeric> Average number of calls answered
Answered: Avg time (s) <numeric> Average time spent on each call answered
Abandoned: Total <numeric> Total number of calls abandoned
Abandoned: Avg % <numeric> Average number of calls abandoned
Busy: Total <numeric> Total number of calls that encounter a busy signal
Busy: Avg % <numeric> Average number of calls that encounter a busy signal
Overflow: Total <numeric> Total number of overflow calls
Overflow: Avg% <numeric> Average number of overflow calls
Time in Queue: <numeric> Time call waits to be answered

Details

Last Reset time <read-only> (Time and date format depends country profile of system)

Reset 1. Select the hunt group member for which you want to reset the metrics, on the Hunt
Groups panel.
2. Click Reset in the bottom frame.
3. Click OK on the confirmation dialog.

Also refer to:


• “Configuring Hunt Groups” on page 49

• “Monitoring individual calls” on page 61

N0027146 [Publish Date]


65

Section 1
DN records
This section contains the following topics:

• Configuring telephones: Digital telephones (page 71)

• DN records parameters (page 91)

• Registering Nortel 20XX IP telephones (page 117)

• Configuring telephones: IP telephones (page 125)

• Common procedures: copying and renumbering DNs (page 87)

• Configuring telephones: Analog devices (page 67)

• Setting up Central Answering Positions (page 129)

• Installing Nortel IP telephones (page 133)

• Default memory button programming for telephones (page 139)

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


66
Section 1: DN records

N0027146 [Publish Date]


67

Section 2: DN records

Configuring telephones: Analog devices

This section refers to the attributes that are specific to analog telephones and devices. Refer to
“Configuring an analog telephone” on page 69.

Tasks: To set up each analog device attached to your system:

Determine the programming for individual telephones and devices attached to analog station
modules or to digital station modules through an analog terminal adapter (ATA) module.
“Analog device DN record overview” on page 68
“Configuring an analog telephone” on page 69

Analog telephones and devices have a limited feature set. They do not have programmable
buttons, access to remote voice mail systems, or user preferences. These telephones also do not
support Answer DNs.

As well, there are specific ATA settings that are required. These settings depend on how the
telephone is connected to the system (ASM, ASM8+, or ATA).

Prerequisite programming:

The following programming must be completed prior to performing this configuration:

• Numbering plan

• Lines programming

• Analog or digital module installation, configuration and wiring to the devices. ATA module, if
required.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


68
Section 2: DN records Configuring telephones: Analog devices

Analog device DN record overview

N0027146 [Publish Date]


69
Configuring telephones: Analog devices Section 2: DN records

Configuring an analog telephone


On each panel on the DNs list, add or modify settings to customize the telephone operations. The
following headings correspond to each panel.

Refer to the Programming notes in each section for configurations that are unique or specific for
ISDN telephones.
Table 1 Analog telephone customization

Affected field Setting Panel name and link to common procedures

Model Other “System DNs - Line Access tab” on page 73


Name Unique to each device or
device loop
Line appearances Ring only “Line Assignment and Line Pools” on page 76
Caller ID set Y (connected to ASM8+
modules or target lines)
Answer DNs Ring only
Intercom keys two: not configurable “Configuring Capabilities & Preferences” on page 78
The following settings are the only capability settings that are valid for analog devices.
ATA Timer Keep short for Modems and “Configuring telephone capabilities” on page 79
Fax machines
ATA tone Y/N
ATA use on site
offsite works for devices
connected to ATA modules
only
ATA Dvc modem/telephone
Set Disconnect Supervision (ASM8+ connections, only)
Y for auto-answer modems
and fax machines
N for telephones
The following settings are common settings that are specific to analog telephones.
Handsfree/HF Answerback N “Configuring telephone capabilities” on page 79
Page settings Page only (Y)
Can send pages but cannot
receive pages
Receive short tones Y (analog telephones, only)
Hotline “Assigning a pause for
external dialing for data
devices” on page 70

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


70
Section 2: DN records Configuring telephones: Analog devices

Table 1 Analog telephone customization (Continued)

Affected field Setting Panel name and link to common procedures

The following settings are not valid (N/V) or are limited on analog devices
Keep DN Alive N/V “Configuring telephone capabilities” on page 79
SM Supervision set to N
DND on Busy set to N
Priority Calls set to N
Auto hold for incoming page set to N
Set Link Y (telephones only) “Outgoing call restrictions” on page 85
All other settings are variable, based on your system requirements.

Assigning a pause for external dialing for data devices

The external Hotline feature provides automatic access to an line when an analog device goes
off-hook.
1 Set Type to External.
2 Set Facility to Use prime line
3 Enter F78 beside External #. This feature code inserts a 1.5-second pause before the device
dials out.

Next steps:
• Test telephones

• Provide user with user guide (Analog Telephone User Guide).

N0027146 [Publish Date]


71

Section 2: DN records

Configuring telephones: Digital telephones

This section describes the procedures for configuring digital telephones. Digital telephones
support the most comprehensive use of the DN records panels. For detailed panel descriptions,
refer to “DN records parameters” on page 91.

Where:

• Element Manager: Configuration//Telephony//Sets//All DNs

• Set-based admin: **CONFIG//Terminals&Sets

The procedures described in this section are the common DN record configuration procedures.

Tasks: To set up digital telephones wired to system station ports:

Determine the programming for individual telephones and devices attached directly to digital
media bay modules or the fixed digital ports on the main chassis.
“Digital telephone DN record overview” on page 72
“Using the DN panels” on page 73
“System DNs - Line Access tab” on page 73
“Line Assignment and Line Pools” on page 76
“Configuring Capabilities & Preferences” on page 78
“Configuring telephone capabilities” on page 79
“Configuring preferences” on page 82
“Telephone memory button programming” on page 83
“User speed dials” on page 84
“Outgoing call restrictions” on page 85

There are a number of different models of digital telephones. The Norstar legacy telephones are
supported by the BCM50. The current models of digital phones include the 7000, 7100, 7208,
7316, 7316E, 7316E+KIMs digital phones, and the 7406 cordless digital phone.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


72
Section 2: DN records Configuring telephones: Digital telephones

Digital telephone DN record overview

Prerequisites
Ensure the following has occurred before you start this procedure:

Modules are installed and you understand which ports/DNs can be assigned to
your telephones. (“Media bay module screens” in the BCM50 Networking
Configuration Guide)
Lines and routes programming has been created for dialing the local PSTN. Target
lines have been created where required by the type of trunks you are using.
(“Configuring Lines”, and “Numbering plan: Routing and routing codes” in the
BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide ).
Appropriate restriction filters have been created to allow or disallow out-dialed
calls. (“Call Security: Restriction filters” in the BCM50 Networking Configuration
Guide)
The telephony system features have been programmed and you understand which
features are not available to all users. (“Global telephony settings” on page 17)

N0027146 [Publish Date]


73
Configuring telephones: Digital telephones Section 2: DN records

Using the DN panels


On each panel on the DNs list, add or modify settings to customize the telephone operations.

For a detailed description of the fields on each panel, refer to “DN records parameters” on page 91.

System DNs - Line Access tab


References: “Job aid: Notes about assigning lines to telephones” on page 73.

1 Select the line listing the appropriate DN for the telephone.


2 Select the field that you want to modify.
3 Name: Enter a name that identifies the user or the location. (Maximum of eight digits).
4 Public OLI: Enter or confirm the number that will display at the far end for calls going out
over the public network.
5 Private OLI: Enter or confirm the number that will display at the far end for calls going over
the private network. This is usually the same as the DN.
6 Call Fwd No Answer to: Enter the number of the device you want to receive calls when this
telephone does not answer. This could be another telephone or a voice mail service.
7 Fwd No Answer Delay: Confirm or change the number of rings you want to occur at the
telephone before a call is forwarded. (Default: 4).
8 Fwd on Busy to: Enter the number of the device you want to receive calls when this telephone
is busy. This could be another telephone or a voice mail service.
9 Next step: “Line Assignment and Line Pools” on page 76.

Job aid: Notes about assigning lines to telephones


Read these notes for more information about assigning lines to telephones.
• The BCM50 Analog Terminal Adapter (ATA2), or a portable telephone cannot process more
than two simultaneous calls.
• Nortel Networks recommends a maximum of four line buttons per telephone. You can
program more than four line buttons on a telephone by programming less than four on other
sets. For example, you might program 20 line buttons on a receptionist telephone equipped as
a CAP station and only two lines on all other telephones.
• You can program a maximum of 93 telephones with a line appearance for a specific line,
including VoIP and target lines. Above this maximum, you can configure more than one
appearance per telephone of a target line.
• Do not assign auto-answer loop start trunks, auto-answer T1 E&M trunks and T1 DID trunks
to telephones. If assigned, use them to monitor incoming call usage, or make outgoing calls
(auto-answer loop start and T1 E&M trunks).

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


74
Section 2: DN records Configuring telephones: Digital telephones

• You cannot assign a line that is configured to private, to another telephone.


• Each line assigned to appear at a telephone must appear at a button with an indicator. The
maximum number of line buttons is 8 for the 7208 digital phones, 10 for the model 7310 and
7316 legacy digital phones, 16 for the 7316E digital phone, and 24 for the model 7324 legacy
digital phone.
However, you need to also consider other button requirements such as intercom buttons and
handsfree buttons. Line programming will not overwrite assigned intercom, Answer DN,
handsfree, or Hunt group buttons. Refer to Figure 17.
Intercom buttons, on the other hand, will overwrite anything. (Figure 18).

Note: You need at least two intercom buttons if you want to use the
conference feature.

• Answer DNs will also overwrite line programming, but not Intercom buttons. Answer DNs
appear above intercom appearances on the telephone buttons. If an intercom button is added
after answer DNs are assigned, the intercom button pushes the answer DNs up. The top
Answer DN overwrites whatever is above it. (Figure 19)

Figure 1 7316E digital phone display button assignment protocol

Lines and hunt


group appearances Answer DNs assign starting above the assigned
assign to first Line intercom buttons (maximum of 8). Answer DNs
available button overwrite line programming.
Line
from top, left#
HG XX

Line

Line Answer DN

Answer DN Intercom buttons assign starting from the bottom,


right* (maximum of 8). Intercom buttons overwrite
Intercom
#Different models of line programming, and push up Answer DNs.
telephones may start at Intercom
other buttons * Other types of telephones may have a Handsfree key assigned
to the lowest key. In that case, intercom buttons start above that
key.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


75
Configuring telephones: Digital telephones Section 2: DN records

Figure 2 Adding an intercom button

Line
If you add an intercom button, the Line Line
Line
Answer DNs move up.
Line Line In this case, giving you one less line Line Line
button. HG XX
HG XX Line Line

Line Line Line Answer DN

Line Answer DN Line Answer DN

Line Answer DN Line Intercom

Line Intercom Line Intercom

Line Intercom Line Intercom

Figure 3 Adding an Answer DN

If you add an Answer DN, the system


Line Line Line Line
overwrites the button above the last
Line Line assigned Answer DN. In this case, giving Line Line
you one less line button.
HG XX Line HG XX Line

Line Line Line Answer DN

Line Answer DN Line Answer DN

Line Answer DN Line Answer DN

Line Intercom Line Intercom

Line Intercom Line Intercom

• If you set a line to Ring only, incoming calls appear on an intercom button.
The 7000, 7100 digital phones are exceptions. They have no line buttons, therefore, you can
assign any number of lines, but only two lines can be answered at any one time. Assign the
lines on these telephones to ring, otherwise, you cannot detect incoming calls on the lines.
• An enhanced central answering position (eCAP), with one or more modules, provides extra
line button support if more than the number of lines are assigned than can assign to available
buttons with indicators. The remaining lines assign to buttons on the module. The eKIM also
supports hunt group designators, and multiple appearances of the same target line, which flow
to the module if there are no available buttons with indicators on the 7316E digital phone.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


76
Section 2: DN records Configuring telephones: Digital telephones

Warning: ECAP programming issue on cold start reboot


If you do a Backup/Cold Start/Restore sequence on your BCM50, button programming on
an enhanced CAP (eCAP) module is lost and the lines assigned to those buttons are
assigned to the buttons on the telephone. They replace any programming on the telephone
buttons, except answer DNs, intercom buttons, handsfree buttons, or Hunt group
appearances. As well, even if there are no more buttons to assign lines to, the system still
has the lines assigned to the telephone and it will ring when a call comes in on that line (if
appear&ring is configured on the line).
To correct the issue, go into the DN records for the telephone and the CAP/KIM button
programming, and reenter the correct programming.

• By using FEATURE *81 at the telephone, lines can be moved to other buttons on the
telephone, except intercom, answer DN, or handsfree positions, or they can be moved to
buttons on the modules on an eCAP. On telephones, the feature or line assigned to the button
where the line is moved, moves to the original line button position. On eCAP modules, moved
lines overwrite feature programming.

Line Assignment and Line Pools


Programming references: “Job aid: Answer DN notes” on page 77

1 In the bottom frame, on the Line Assignment panel, use the Add button to add line
assignments for the telephone.
2 Determine how the line behaves at the telephone.

Note: Not all of these fields apply to all types of lines.

• Appearance type
• Appearances (target lines)
• Caller ID set (target lines)
• Vmsg set
• Received Number (target lines)
3 Click on the Line Pool Access tab.
4 Use the Add button to add line pools for the telephone.
5 Click on the Answer DNs tab.
6 Use the Add button to add a maximum of eight Answer DNs to the telephone.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


77
Configuring telephones: Digital telephones Section 2: DN records

Programming note:
• If the telephone does not have any buttons with indicators available to provide an Answer
DN appearance, ensure that Appearance Type is set to Ring only.
• Answer DNs that are assigned to buttons can also be used to auto dial that telephone.

Job aid: Answer DN notes


You can assign a maximum number of eight answer DNs to a telephone. You can also determine
what types of calls alert at the telephone where the answer DNs are assigned. Refer to “Answer
DN answer key levels” on page 22.

Note: You cannot assign answer DNs to 7000 or 7100 telephones


because they do not have memory buttons.

Warning: Call Center restrictions: If you assign answer DNs, ensure that the Answer
Key field (General settings, Feature settings) is set to Basic.

Mobility sets: 7406 cordless digital phones: You can twin desk sets with the portable sets by
assigning one or more handset DNs to a desk telephone Answer DN.

Doorphone note: Before installing doorphone hardware, ensure that you delete any lines, line
pools, or answer DNs assigned to the DN record you plan to use for the doorphone.

Hunt group note: A linear Hunt group that has defined an overflow telephone does not support
having the overflow telephone assigned as an Answer DN to any hunt group member. If this
occurs, the Answer DN will not ring at the hunt group telephone when an overflow condition
occurs.

Autodial function: Answer DNs can also act as an internal autodial link to the assigned telephone.
The answer DN must be idle for this feature to work. That is, there must be no active indicator
showing beside the button.
The system still sees the key as an Answer DN, and any key press still interacts with other features
in that way. Therefore, even though you are making an internal call, any other autodial actions do
not occur. As well, none of the autodial visual prompts occur. That means that the button will still
only prompt if a call is alerting at the other telephone, based on the answer key level assigned to
the system. Refer to “Answer DN answer key levels” on page 22.
You can program both an Answer DN and an autodial key for the same DN on the same telephone.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


78
Section 2: DN records Configuring telephones: Digital telephones

Configuring Capabilities & Preferences


Where:

• Element Manager: Configuration//Telephony//Sets//All DNs

• Set-based admin:

Programming reference:

• “Capabilities and Preferences main tab” on page 100

• “Job aid: Assigning intercom (I/C) buttons (keys)” on page 78

1 Select the field that you want to modify.


2 Prime Line: Enter the facility that you want the telephone to use if no line, line access code or
routing code is dialed before an outgoing dial string.
3 Intercom keys: Confirm or change how many intercom keys you want the telephone to have.
Default is 2.
Programming note: At least one intercom key needs to be defined to allow internal calls.
Two intercom keys are recommended if the user will be using conference calling. Model 7000
and 7100 telephones are automatically assigned two intercom keys, so users can alternate
between two active calls.
4 Control set: If the telephone uses any schedules other than the Normal schedule, ensure that a
DN for a control set is entered.
5 First display: Choose Name if you want the user to see the name of the caller first. Otherwise,
you can set this field to Number, which displays the telephone number first, or to Line, which
displays the line number the call is coming in on first.
6 Auto Called ID: Set to yes if you want the user to see the name and number display of the
telephone they call.
7 Next Step: “Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities tab” on page 102

Job aid: Assigning intercom (I/C) buttons (keys)

The Intercom keys attribute assigns the number of intercom buttons that display on a telephone.
Intercom buttons provide access to a maximum of eight internal and/or external lines and line
pools. The user presses the intercom key to answer internal calls, or to select a line or line pool to
make a call. Lines configured for ring-only also appear on intercom buttons.
• If you assign a prime line to an intercom key, when you press the button or pick up the handset
you are immediately connected to a line and a line indicator appears beside the intercom
button.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


79
Configuring telephones: Digital telephones Section 2: DN records

• When you assign each intercom button during programming, it automatically appears on the
telephone. The intercom buttons appear starting at the lower-right button, or one button above
it if the handsfree feature appears on the telephone. They overwrite any feature or line
programming that existed on that button. They do not overwrite answer DNs. Instead, the
answer DNs are pushed up one button.
• A telephone requires two intercom button to establish a conference call with two other
BCM50 telephones.
• You require only one intercom button if the button is used to make and receive internal calls,
and to access line pools. Doorphones only require one intercom key.
• You require two intercom buttons for a telephone with several lines assigned to Ring only.
• Model 7000 and 7100 telephones and analog telephones are automatically assigned two
intercom buttons. This allows users to toggle between two active calls using the Hold button.

Caution: PRI Lines


Users cannot access PRI lines directly through line appearances.
PRI lines must be part of a line pool.
If you change a digital trunk module (DTM) to PRI, the system automatically removes all
existing line appearances for that module.

Configuring telephone capabilities


Programming reference:

• “Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities tab” on page 102

• “Job aid: Line redirection notes” on page 80

1 In the bottom frame, on the Capabilities panel, confirm or change how the telephone functions
with system features.
2 Handsfree settings:
• Handsfree: Select the setting that is appropriate for the type of telephone.
• HF answerback: Select Y only if the telephone allows handsfree and is in an environment
where speakers will not cause disruption.
3 Page settings:
• Page Zone: If you have various areas that receive different page announcements, put the
telephone in the appropriate zone.
• Paging: Set to Y if the telephone can send and/or receive page messages.
Programming note: Telephones without speakers, such as the model 7000 and 7100
allow page messages to be sent but not to be received.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


80
Section 2: DN records Configuring telephones: Digital telephones

4 Interrupting calls:
• DND on Busy: Set to Y if you want the caller to receive a Do Not Disturb message if the
telephone is busy. Ensure this is set to N, if the Fwd on Busy to field has a value.
• Priority Call: Select Y if you want the user to be able to forward calls that alert at the
telephone where the call was forwarded, even if it is busy.
• Intrusion: Select an intrusion level if you want the user to be able to break into calls on
other telephones. The intrusion level must be the same or higher than the telephone being
interrupted.
5 Auto Hold: Select Y if you want calls coming into the telephone to automatically go on hold if
the user answers another call or dials out while an incoming call is active.
6 Aux Ringer: Select Y if there is an external ringer attached, and you want calls coming into
this telephone to alert at the external ringer.
7 Redirect settings:
• Allow Redirect: Set to Y if you want the user to be able to redirect active lines to other
telephones.
• Redirect Ring: Set to Y if you want calls coming into a redirected line to give a small alert.
8 Receive Short Tones: This should always be set to N for digital telephones.
9 Administrative capabilities:
• Pickup Group: If you want this telephone to be able to be answered by other telephones in
a defined group, choose the appropriate group. Otherwise, leave the setting at None.
• Direct Dial: Select the direct dial telephone assignment that you want this telephone to be
able to dial with one digit (direct dial access code).
• Keep DN Alive: Set to Y if you plan to move the telephone and want the telephone
programming to follow to the new location.
• SM Supervisor: Set to Y if this user will be monitoring hunt group calls.
• Reset Call Log Password: If the user forgets their Call Log password, select this checkbox
to reset the password to blank.
• Hotline: Enter an external number that is automatically dialed if the receiver is picked up.
10 Next step: “Configuring preferences” on page 82.

Job aid: Line redirection notes


This feature allows you to send your external calls to a telephone outside the office. You can
decide to redirect all, or just some, of your external lines.

Warning: You redirect lines at a telephone, but after redirection programming, the lines
redirect for the entire system.

Warning: While you are programming Line Redirection, you do not receive any
indication of calls that do not actually ring at your telephone.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


81
Configuring telephones: Digital telephones Section 2: DN records

Warning: Be careful about redirection loops. For example, if you redirect your lines to
your branch office and your branch office redirects its lines to you, you can create a
redirection loop. If these calls are long distance, significant toll charges may result.

You can redirect only lines that appear at line buttons on your telephone. Since 7000 and 7100
digital do not have line buttons, you cannot use this feature on those telephones. Also, you cannot
use the feature on any telephone connected to an ATA2 or ASM/GASM (analog station modules).
You can answer the telephone if it rings while you are programming Line Redirection, however,
none of the call handling features are available until the feature times out. If you need to use a
feature to process the call, quit Line Redirection programming by pressing FEATURE. Do not
press RELEASE or you disconnect the call you are trying to redirect.

In some conditions, callers can experience lower volume levels when you redirect calls to an
external location.

DPNSS notes
(UK only)

DPNSS lines connected to an Embark switch perform call redirection using the Call Forward
feature to create a tandem link back to the switch.
Before you program Call Forwarding on lines on an Embark switch line, ensure that:
• The DTM is configured to DPNSS and the Host Node switch connection is set to Embark.
• Both real channels and virtual channels are provisioned.
• Routing code or line pool code are programmed for the DPNSS to Embark link.
• Allow redirect must be set to Y (Yes). This field is also located under Capabilities.

During telephone programming for Call Forward No Answer and Call Forward on Busy, when
you enter the Forward to: digits, the system does a validation check with the switch on the
number. If the validation does not succeed, the system displays one of the messages shown in
Table 20.

Table 1 Embark validation error messages

Message Description
The number is invalid or the destination has The destination telephone had DND programmed, or it was in
been rejected. a programming session.
There are no free virtual channels available You either did not set up enough channels or there were no
for validation. more available.
Destination may be out of service, no The system could not connect to the remote system.
response received.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


82
Section 2: DN records Configuring telephones: Digital telephones

Configuring preferences
Where:

Element Manager:Configuration//Telephony

Set-based admin:

Programming reference:

• “Capabilities and Preferences - Preferences tab” on page 105

• “Job aid: Call log notes” on page 82

Use this panel to determine some telephone operational attributes. All of these attributes also can
be set by the user at the telephone, and would override these settings.

1 Click in the field that you want to change.


2 Call Log Options: Determine when calls will be logged.
3 Dialing Options: Determine how the user will dial numbers.
Programming note: Some telephones do not allow all dialing options.
4 Contrast: Adjust the contrast level of the display.
5 Ring type: If you want incoming calls to produce a specific type of ring, perhaps to
differentiate between two telephones that are in close proximity, select one of the four ring
types. If you select None, the default ring is used.
6 Next step: “Capabilities and Preferences - Button Programming tabs” on page 109

Job aid: Call log notes

If your system has the appropriate equipment, and you subscribe to the call information feature
supplied by your service provider, you can record information about calls received from an
external line. ISDN service packages that come with calling line identification (CLID) can supply
the same feature.

Note: Your cordless and wireless telephones may not support this feature, or they may
only support some of the functions of the feature.

Call Log creates a record of incoming external calls to a telephone even if the telephone does not
have that line assigned. For each call, the log can contain:
• sequence number in the Call Log
• name and number of the caller
• indication if the call was long distance
• indication if the call was answered and by whom

N0027146 [Publish Date]


83
Configuring telephones: Digital telephones Section 2: DN records

• time and date of the call


• number of repeated calls from the same source
• name of the line on which the call came

Call Log can help to:


• keep track of discarded calls, or calls not answered
• track patterns for your callers (for example volume of calls and geographic area of calls)
• record caller information quickly and accurately
• build a personal telephone directory from log items
Information such as long distance indicator and the caller name and number, may not show in the
log. The appearance depends on the Call Display services provided by your local telephone
company and the local telephone company at the caller end.
Call logging limitations:
• A total of 600 log spaces are shared by all telephones assigned with call log space. To ensure
that this list does not fill up and start rejecting logs, ensure that Autobumping is enabled
(FEATURE 815).
• If you answer the call, then forward it, the call will log only at the forwarding telephone.
• If call forward is set, the calls will be logged at both the forwarding telephone and the target
telephone, providing the target telephone answered the call.
• If the call is released by the telephone to which the call was forwarded, only the forwarding
telephone logs the call.
• Hunt group calls are only logged once a call is answered.
• If a call is redirected to the Prime telephone, and it is answered at the prime telephone, then the
call is logged at both the redirecting telephone and the prime telephone. If the call is answered
by the intended telephone, then the call is logged only at that telephone.
• If the telephone is experiences a warm-reset, all log entries are flushed.
• If a line has been redirected, calls will not be logged.

Telephone memory button programming


Use this panel to assign features to available buttons on the telephone.

Programming reference:

• “Capabilities and Preferences - Button Programming tabs” on page 109

• “Job aid: Notes about button programming” on page 84

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


84
Section 2: DN records Configuring telephones: Digital telephones

1 The model shown in the Select set field determines the number of available buttons.
Programming note: Assigned lines, answer DNs, hunt group designators and intercom keys
cannot be overridden using this template.
2 Select the field beside the button you want to configure or change.
3 Select XXXX from XXXXX
4 Next step: “User speed dials” on page 84

Job aid: Notes about button programming


• The number of available button positions, will depend on the model of telephone that you are
programming.
• New button programming will overwrite any memory button programming performed at the
telephone by the user. Conversely, any changes to memory button programming performed by
the user at the telephone, after button programming, will overwrite memory keys programmed
under Button programming or CAP/KIM button programming. The panels will reflect these
changes.
• The 7316 digital phone has disjointed button numbering because it is patterned after the legacy
7310 button programming, but has fewer available buttons. However, the Button
programming heading shows all the keys available for a legacy 7310 telephone. Refer to the
default button programming section and ensure that you program the correct button numbers.
• IP telephones have three (2001), nine (2002) and 12 (2004) programmable memory keys, as
well as a display feature list that can contain up to 10 items. Refer to “IP features list” on
page 223 for information about setting up this list. The 2001 IP telephone has an additional
five non-visible buttons that can be programmed with Answer DNs or SWCA controls.

Button labeling
T-series telephones have a paper strip of labels that can be customized and printed using the
Desktop Assistant or Desktop Assistant Pro application. These applications are located under the
Client Applications button on the first Element Manager web page. Desktop Assistant Pro requires
a LAN CTE keycode before it can be used.

IP telephones also have soft display labels. Refer to “IP features list” on page 223.

User speed dials


Use this panel to assign telephone numbers to speed dial codes. These codes will be available to all
telephones in the system. The number of available codes is determined under system feature
programming.

Programming references:

• “Capabilities and Preferences - User Speed Dial tab” on page 111

N0027146 [Publish Date]


85
Configuring telephones: Digital telephones Section 2: DN records

1 Use the Add button to enter external number that will be dialed and the facility the system will
use to dial out the number.
2 Enter a unique name for each speed dial. This name displays for incoming calls that match the
external number.
3 Program the speed dial code onto telephone buttons, and label.
4 Next step: “Outgoing call restrictions” on page 85

Outgoing call restrictions


Restriction filters determine what dialing strings are allowed or blocked from the user. You can
specify restriction filters specific to the telephone, as well as filters that are specific to a line
assigned to the telephone.

Programming reference:

• “Restrictions main tab” on page 113

• restriction filters

• line restrictions

• CoS passwords

1 Select the field that you want to modify.


2 Set Lock: Determine how much programming the user will be able to perform at their
telephone. (None, Partial, Full)
Refer to “Restrictions main tab” on page 113 for a description of what is allowed for each
level.
3 Allow last Number: Enter Y if you want to allow Last-number redial for numbers dialed from
the telephone.
4 Allow Saved Number: Enter Y if you want to allow redialing a saved number.
5 Allow Link: Set this to Y only for analog telephones.

Set restrictions

Assign restriction filters for the schedules that will affect this telephone.

Programming reference:

• “Restrictions - Set Restrictions tab” on page 114

• Restriction filters

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


86
Section 2: DN records Configuring telephones: Digital telephones

1 Select the field you want to change.


2 Enter the restriction filter appropriate for the schedule. You will always need a filter specified
for the Normal schedule.
3 Repeat for each schedule.

Line/Set restrictions

Assign restriction filters for the schedules that will affect the lines assigned to this telephone.

Programming reference:

• “Restrictions - Line/Set Restrictions tab” on page 115

• Restriction filters

1 Select the line you want to modify.


2 Select the field you want to modify on that line.
3 Enter the restriction filter appropriate for the schedule. You will always need a filter specified
for the Normal schedule.
4 Repeat for each line.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


87

Section 2: DN records

Common procedures: copying and renumbering DNs

Tasks: Understanding common tasks

• “Copying settings to other DNs” on page 87


• “Renumbering DNs” on page 88

Copying settings to other DNs


The Copy command allows you to duplicate programming for a telephone and apply it to another
telephone, a range of telephones, or to all the telephones on the system. If information is copied to
a record with an assigned telephone, the copy information replaces the existing settings.
Note: Unique configurations, such as the Name, do not copy over.

Follow these steps to copy telephone configurations:

1 Click on the keys beside Services, Telephony Services, System DNs, and Active Set DNs.
2 Click the DN number for the record that has the settings you want to copy.
If you want to copy a specific part of the record, open the DN record and pick the heading you
want to copy, such as Line Access or Capabilities.
3 On the Edit menu, click Copy.
The following panel appears, depending on which heading you selected:
4 The following table describes the fields that appear in the various copy panels. Choose the
settings that will set up the system to copy the information you want to the DNs you specify.
Table 1 Copy values

Attribute Value Description

Data type System data Only available on DN copy panel.


System+user data

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


88
Section 2: DN records Common procedures: copying and renumbering DNs

Table 1 Copy values

Attribute Value Description

Copy Type Single Single: copy to one DN record


Range Range: copy to a range of DN records
All All: copy to all DN records
Copy to: <DN> Enter the DN of the telephone to which you want to copy the
If Copy type is single information. Note that if this telephone is a different model than
the copy DN, some of the information may not be copied.
Copy to: no value Click in the field. A new panel appears.
If Copy type is Range or All
Only equipped sets Y, N If you only want to copy information to DN records that have
assigned telephones, choose Y.
If you want to copy the information to all DN records or DN
records specified in the range, choose N.
Start of range/End of Range <DN> If you specified a Copy type of Range, enter the first and last DNs
of the range of telephones to which you want the information
copied.

5 Click the OK button.


If you are copying to a number of records, this process could take some time to complete. Do
not attempt to go in and make any adjustments to individual DN records until the copy process
is finished.

Caution: Caller ID set (DNXXX, Line Access, Line Assignment, Line XXX).
You can only enable Caller ID Set (target lines and analog devices attached to an ASM8+)
on a maximum of 30 telephones. If you attempt to copy an enabled setting to more than 30
sets, you will receive an error message.

Renumbering DNs
Your system auto assigns DNs based on the hardware for digital telephones, or, in the case of IP
telephones, you choose to auto assign DNs when the telephones register to the system.

When you change a DN, the DN record retains the same port number, since the telephone is not
being physically moved. The original DN then assigns to the port vacated by the DN that you
assign as the new DN. If you filled out the DN/Port record in the Programming Records, remember
to change the entries.

Change telephone DNs using the Element Manager

The General Settings heading also provides access to a panel where you can change the DN
setting.

1 Click on the keys beside Services, Telephony Services.


2 Click on General settings.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


89
Common procedures: copying and renumbering DNs Section 2: DN records

3 On the top menu, click on Configuration and choose Change DN.


The Change DN panel appears.
4 Click beside Old DN and enter the DN or group of DNs you want to change.
5 Click beside New DN and enter the DN or group of DNs you want to change to.
6 Click OK to start the change process.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


90
Section 2: DN records Common procedures: copying and renumbering DNs

N0027146 [Publish Date]


91

Section 2: DN records

DN records parameters

The DN record defines the specific function of each telephone within the system.

Where:

• Element Manager: Telephony//System DNs

• Set-based admin: **CONFIG//Terminals&Sets

Other areas of programming that affect how each telephone functions include:

• system settings (“Global telephony settings” on page 17)

• telephone model

The DN records panel is a multi-layered, multi-tabbed panel. Although all panels show up for all
models, not all models will require configuration for all panels. Refer to the task and feature
programming links to determine specific configuration.

The panel tabs links provide a general description of each paenl and definitions of each panel field.

Click on one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view:

Panel tabs Tasks Features

“Main panel tabs: common fields” on “Common procedures: copying “Feature configuration: Answering
page 93 and renumbering DNs” on calls” on page 157
page 87

“Line Access tab” on page 93 “Configuring telephones: Digital “Feature configuration: Making
telephones” on page 71 calls” on page 209

“Line Access - Line Assignment “Configuring telephones: Analog “Hotline telephone” on page 181
tab” on page 96 devices” on page 67

“Line Access - Line Pool “DN records: ISDN devices” in the “Control telephone” on page 182
Access tab” on page 98 BCM50 Networking Configuration
Guide

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


92
Section 2: DN records DN records parameters

Panel tabs Tasks Features

“Line Access - Answer DNs tab” “Supervisor telephone for silent


on page 99 monitoring” on page 183

“Capabilities and Preferences main


tab” on page 100

“Capabilities and Preferences -


Capabilities tab” on page 102

“Capabilities and Preferences - “Features to set up telephone set


Preferences tab” on page 105 features” on page 153
“Auxiliary ringer” on page 234

“Capabilities and Preferences -


ATA settings tab” on page 107

“Capabilities and Preferences - “Configuring telephones: IP “Global IP features” on page 223


IP Terminal Details tab” on telephones” on page 125
page 108

“Capabilities and Preferences - “Default memory button


Button Programming tabs” on programming for telephones” on
page 109 (includes CAP/KIM page 139
button programming) “Creating an enhanced CAP
station” on page 186

“Capabilities and Preferences - “System features and feature


User Speed Dial tab” on codes” on page 255
page 111

“Restrictions main tab” on page 113 “Call Security: Restriction filters”


in the BCM50 Networking
Configuration Guide

“Restrictions - Set Restrictions “Configuring remote access


tab” on page 114 packages” in the BCM50
Networking Configuration Guide

“Restrictions - Line/Set “Restrictions (Line & Remote)” in


Restrictions tab” on page 115 the BCM50 Networking
Configuration Guide

Click on the navigation tree heading to access general information about DN records.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


93
DN records parameters Section 2: DN records

Main panel tabs: common fields


All main panel tabs display the same first three columns in Table 22.
Table 1 Common columns for the main tabs

Attribute Value Description

DN <numeric> This number is unique to each telephone record. The number


identifies the telephone to the system. DN start digits and DN length
are configured during system setup.
Digital and analog phone DNs map one-to-one with ports on module
connections. IP telephone DNs do not map to specific ports, but a
keycode is required to activate the feature.
Model 7100 This heading appears for telephones in the digital DN range, which
7208 starts at the Start DN (default: 221) up to DN 433. Choose the
setting that is appropriate for the telephone you want to configure.
7310/7316
This field will be read-only if the telephone is already attached or
7324 registered to the system.
2004/2050 • 7310/7316: also 7406 cordless digital phone
2002 • 7316E: Also for 7316E digital phone with KIMs
2001 • Other: Analog telephones, 7000 digital phone
7316E
Other
Name <up to seven alphanumeric Use this field to provide a more specific description of the telephone,
characters> such as the last name of the user or the location, or the actual
extension number if it is different than the DN number.
Also refer to “Programming name display (outgoing)” in the BCM50
Networking Configuration Guide.

Line Access tab


The Line Access tab displays the System DNs table There are four headings unders sets, which
provides basic telephone information. Line access programming is performed using the three tabs
in the bottom panel.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


94
Section 2: DN records DN records parameters

Figure 1 System DNs table

Table 23 describes these fields.

Table 2 Line Access - System DNs table fields

Attribute Value Description

DN <read only> Refer to “Main panel tabs: common fields” on page 93.
Model <alphanumeric> Refer to “Main panel tabs: common fields” on page 93.
Name <alphanumeric> Refer to “Main panel tabs: common fields” on page 93.
Port <port number> This number indicates the port number that this DN corresponds to.
A group of port numbers relates to a specific station module installed
in your BCM50. If you change the DN for a telephone, the port
number remains the same.
If you physically move a telephone with the relocation feature turned
on, the DN transfers to the new port, and the DN for that port
transfers to the vacated location.
*Public OLI <up to 10 digits> This setting defaults to the DN of the device. The Public Network
Code concatenates to the beginning of this number to create the
entire public network number. The length of this number is
dependant on the country requirements.
This line identification number (OLI) appears on the telephone being
called from this telephone over the public network. Refer to “Public
network settings” in the BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide.
North America: If the OLI contains the public network code, the
information in the Public Network code field is ignored. Therefore, it
is recommended that OLIs be programmed to the public received
number length, only. This would allow a global change if the Public
Network Code is changed.
Note: If line pools are not properly configured, an extension may
use a line with a network range that does not include the OLI of the
telephone, causing the network to present an incorrect CLID to the
called party.
Also refer to “Configuring CLID on your system” in the BCM50
Networking Configuration Guide.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


95
DN records parameters Section 2: DN records

Table 2 Line Access - System DNs table fields (Continued)

Attribute Value Description

*Private OLI Define the originating line identification number (OLI) which appears
on the telephone being called from this telephone over a private
network.
Note: On systems running DID, this field is automatically populated
with the DN.
On PBX systems, this field is only automatically populated if the DN
length and the Received # length are the same.
If the DN length or the Received # length are changed so they are
different from each other, this field is cleared.
Also refer to “Configuring CLID on your system” in the BCM50
Networking Configuration Guide.
*If your system allows outgoing name and number blocking, the telephone must have a valid OLI.
Fwd no answer up to 24 digits Enter the number to which you want to redirect unanswered
incoming calls.
Fwd delay 2, 3, 4, 6, 10 Define the number of rings before the system forwards an
unanswered call.
This heading only appears after you enter a Call Forward No
Answer number and press Enter.
Fwd busy up to 24 digits Redirect incoming calls when this telephone is busy with another
call.
Fwd all up to 24 digits This setting is the same as using FEATURE 4 at a telephone. When
this feature is active, all calls to this telephone are forwarded to the
destination entered in this field.
If you are forwarding calls to a remote location, ensure that you
include the required destination/access codes.
A user can press FEATURE #4 to cancel this feature.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


96
Section 2: DN records DN records parameters

Line Access - Line Assignment tab


The line assignment setting allows you to assign physical trunks and target lines to each telephone.
Target lines are incoming only. Other lines can be used to both make and answer calls if they are
configured to do so.

Figure 2 Line Access - Line Assignment tabbed panel - Assigned Lines table

Table 24 describes the fields on this panel.


Table 3 Telephone line assignment fields

Attribute Values Description

Line <read-only> These are the lines that this telephone can receive calls on. If the
line is a two-way line (DID), the user can also use the line to make
calls.
Also refer to “Configuring Lines” in the BCM50 Networking
Configuration Guide.
Appearance Type Ring only, Appear & Select how a call on this line shows on the telephone.
Ring, Appear only If you choose Appr&Ring or Appr only, you can have as many
simultaneous DID calls as there are target line button appearances.
If you choose Ring only, you can have as many simultaneous DID
calls as you have intercom buttons.
Note: The BCM50 does not support a mixture of Appr only and Ring
only appearances for the same line.
7000 or 7100 digital phones default to Ring Only.
Appearances <1-10> Select the number of appearances of a target line.
(for target lines, only) Note: The number of appearances that can actually be assigned to
a telephone, depends on how many buttons with indicators are
available. Target line appearances cannot overwrite other line
appearances, Answer DNs, Intercom buttons, or assigned
Handsfree button.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


97
DN records parameters Section 2: DN records

Table 3 Telephone line assignment fields (Continued)

Attribute Values Description

Caller ID set <checkbox> This prompt only appears for target lines, and any analog lines that
provide CLID through an GASM8 (not all markets).
When enabled, the telephone displays call information when it is
available for a call. This setting also is used in conjunction with other
settings to create the alpha tagging feature. Refer to “Using alpha
tagging for name display (incoming)” in the BCM50 Networking
Configuration Guide.
When disabled, no call information is displayed for this line. Choose
this setting if the telephone does not have a display, or if you do not
want call information displayed to the user. Disabling this function
can reduce system resource requirements.
Limitation: Only 30 telephones can have this field enabled for any
given line.
Vmsg set <checkbox> Select whether an indicator shows on the telephone for a voice
message waiting on an external voice message system.
The line must appear on receiving telephone.
Note: the Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) is currently supported
exclusively by Meridian Mail and CallPilot.
MCDN note: If your system is part of an MCDN network connected
to a Meridian 1 system, and you are using the voice mail system off
the Meridian 1, you need to enable this field.
Analog lines connected to legacy analog ASM station modules, and
analog telephones attached to an ATA device, do not provide visible
message waiting indication. Analog telephones connected to a
GASM8 support message indicators, if the telephone is set up to
receive them.
Note: Contact your voice message service provider to find out if your voice message service
works with BCM50, or if you have any problems with your service.
Priv. Received # These fields reflect the settings defined under target lines.
(Target lines only) These are the digit strings that the system uses to identify a call for this telephone.
Pub. Received # Refer to “Trunk/Line Data, main panel” in the BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide.
(Target lines only)
Actions

Add To add a line to a telephone:


1. On the System DNs table (Line access tab), choose the DN record where you want to
add lines.
2. Under the Assigned Lines table, click Add.
3. Enter a line number in the dialog box.
4. Click OK to save the line to the list.
Delete 1. On the System DNs table (Line access tab), choose the DN record where you want to
delete lines.
2. On the Assigned Lines table, select a line you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click OK to confirm the selection.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


98
Section 2: DN records DN records parameters

Line Access - Line Pool Access tab


This tab allows you to add line pools to a telephone record.

Figure 3 Line Access - Line Pool Access tab

These shared pools of lines allow many users to use fewer lines for connections where dedicated
lines are not practical or not desirable. If all lines in the pool are taken, the user receives a busy
signal.
Some trunks, such as PRI and VoIP need to be put into line pools. For incoming calls, these lines
use target lines to access the system telephones. For outgoing calls, the line pools are assigned to
the telephones that will be calling out over these trunks.

All lines except PRI lines are configured in line pools A to O. PRI lines can be configured into line
pools BLOC-A to BLOC-F.
Table 25 describes the access fields on this panel.
Table 4 Line Pool Access fields

Attribute Values Description

Line Pool <read-only> This is a list of available line pools. Pick the ones that provide the
outgoing call access you want for the telephone.

Actions

Add 1. On the System DNs table (Line access tab), choose the DN record where you want to
add line pools.
2. Under the Line Pools table, click Add.
3. Enter a line pool in the dialog box.
4. Click OK on the dialog box to save the line pool to the list.
Delete 1. On the System DNs table (Line access tab), choose the DN record where you want to
delete line pools.
2. On the Line Pools table, select a line pool you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click OK on the dialog box.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


99
DN records parameters Section 2: DN records

Line Access - Answer DNs tab


Program a telephone to provide automatic call alerting and call answering for other telephones in
the system. The DNs of the other telephones are referred to as answer DNs.

Figure 4 Line Access - Answer DNs tab

Table 23 describes the access fields on this panel.

Table 5 Line pool access fields - answer DNs


Attribute Values Description

DN <DN number> From the main panel DN list.


Appearance Type Appr&Ring, Appr only, Define how calls to the Answer DN will present on this telephone:
Ring only Appr&Ring: Call prompt appears beside the Answer DN button, and
the telephone rings.
Appr only: A call prompt appears beside the Answer DN button.
Ring only: The telephone rings.
Notes:
Every answer DN you assign to the telephone automatically designates an appearance on the answer telephone
beside a button with an indicator, if one is available. Answer DNs overwrite feature assignments to buttons with
indicators. They do not overwrite line, Hunt group, intercom, or handsfree assignments.
If no buttons are available on the telephone, ensure that you program the Answer DN as Ring only. In that case,
when a call comes in to the other telephone, the user will receive a ring tone.

Actions

Add You can add a maximum of eight Answer DNs per telephone.
1. On the System DNs table (Line access tab), choose the DN record where you want to
add Answer DNs.
2. Under the Answer DNs table, click Add.
3. Enter the appropriate DN in the dialog box.
4. Click OK to save the entry.
5. On the Answer DNs table, select the Appearance type field beside the Answer DN you
just entered and choose the appropriate appearance type.
Programming Note: If the telephone has memory buttons with display designators, the
system automatically assigns Answer DNs to buttons starting at the bottom, right row of
buttons. If the telephone has Handsfree assigned to a memory button, the Answer DNs start
above that button. If the telephone has no memory buttons with display, ensure that you
choose Ring Only as the Appearance type.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


100
Section 2: DN records DN records parameters

Attribute Values Description

Delete 1. On the System DNs table (Line access tab), choose the DN record where you want to
delete Answer DNs.
1. On the Answer DNs table, select the Answer DN line you want to delete.
2. Click Delete.
3. Click OK to save the selection.

Capabilities and Preferences main tab


Capabilities settings control how the system interacts with individual telephones, and how the
telephones receive calls.
Preferences control how the telephone itself works. These settings can also be set by users at the
telephones using feature codes.

Figure 5 Capabilities and Preferences table panel

Table 27 describes the fields shown on the main Capabilities and Preferences tabbed panel.

Table 6 Capabilities and Preferences tabbed panel

Attribute Values Description

DN <read only> Refer to “Main panel tabs: common fields” on page 93.
Model <alphanumeric> Refer to “Main panel tabs: common fields” on page 93.
Name <numeric> Refer to “Main panel tabs: common fields” on page 93.
Prime Line None, Pool (A to O), Choose the first line that the telephone selects when a call is made.
I/C (intercom), PRI pools are not valid selections for a Prime line.
Line: <line number> When you assign a line pool as a prime line, the system searches
automatically for an idle line in the pool.
Doorphone: Before you install the doorphone hardware, ensure that this
line is set to None on the DN record you are assigning to the doorphone.
Intercom keys 0 to 8 Assign the number of intercom buttons to a telephone.
Intercom buttons provide a telephone with access to internal and external
lines, and line pools.
Doorphone: Before you install the doorphone hardware, assign one
intercom key to the DN record you are assigning to the doorphone.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


101
DN records parameters Section 2: DN records

Table 6 Capabilities and Preferences tabbed panel

Attribute Values Description

Control set DN: <any telephone The Control telephone attribute allows you to define a DN that will act as
DN> a control telephone.
None A control telephone is used to enable/disable Scheduled Services, such
DN:221<start DN>* as Restriction Services, for the telephones to which it is assigned. For
more information about services, see “System schedule settings and
services scheduling” on page 37.
You can assign several control sets for your system but you can only
assign one control telephone per DN.
* If you changed the Start DN, this number reflects that change.
Doorphone note: Ensure this DN does not belong to a doorphone.
First display Name Determine what call display information appears first.
Number This feature depends on which services you subscribe to. Call Display
Line information may contain the name of the caller, the number of the caller,
the name of the line in your BCM50 where the call came in, or all. For
each telephone, you can determine what information displays first.
See also “Programming incoming CLID” in the BCM50 Networking
Configuration Guide.
Tips: The Call Information feature displays and toggles between the name and line number for
Call Display information.
Alpha tagging: If you are using the alpha tagging feature, choose Name. Refer to “Using alpha
tagging for name display (incoming)” in the BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide.
Auto called ID <checkbox> Select whether you want to see the extension number and name of the
true/false telephone you call on your display.
The Auto called ID set for target lines is the same telephone that has an
appearance on that target line.
Set log space <read-only> This setting indicates the amount of space that the user has to store call
log items for the telephone. Default: 20.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


102
Section 2: DN records DN records parameters

Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities tab


Capabilities settings control how the system interacts with individual telephones, and how the
telephones receive calls.

Note: Not all the fields shown below will necessarily appear for any one
type of telephone. Some fields relate to specific models of telephones.

Figure 6 Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities tab panel

Table 28 describes the fields on this panel.

Table 7 Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities panel fields

Attribute Values Description

Handsfree None None: The handsfree feature is not available to this telephone (7000 and
Standard 7100 digital phones, 2001 IP phones, and any portable handset that does not
have an external speaker).
Auto
Standard: The handsfree feature is activated by pressing a button on the
telephone.
Auto: The handsfree feature is activated when the telephone receives a call.
Digital Doorphone note: Before you install the doorphone hardware, ensure
this field is set to Auto in the DN record you want to use for the doorphone.
Note: Handsfree must be enabled on any telephone that allows headsets.
For 7316E digital phones, set Handsfree to Auto.
7406 digital cordless phone: Handsfree must be enabled for this handset to
work.
Speaker volume: Note that the speaker volume returns to the telephone
default setting for each new handsfree call.
Pickup group None Assigns this telephone to a pickup group.
1 to 9 This is a group where all telephones ring until one is answered.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


103
DN records parameters Section 2: DN records

Table 7 Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities panel fields (Continued)

Attribute Values Description

Page zone Page zone Assigns this telephone to a page zone.


(1 to 6) A zone is any group of telephones that you want to group together for paging
None regardless of their location. You can assign one of six zones to each
telephone.
The maximum number of digital telephones in a page zone is 50.
The maximum number of digital and IP telephones in a page zone is 60.
Direct dial Set 1 to Set 5 Defines whether you can call the direct-dial telephone from this telephone
None using the direct-dial digit.
Digital Doorphone note: Before you install the doorphone hardware, ensure
this is set to None in the DN record you want to use for the doorphone.
Intrustion Protection None If the break-in feature is allowed on any private network MCDN lines (PRI
Level Low SL-1) assigned to the telephone, you need to define the level of intrusion for
each telephone. This determines if the user can use the feature, and to what
Med(ium) degree.
This feature has been High
removed None: feature is turned off, user cannot break in on any calls
Low: user can only break into calls on other telephones with low level
protection
Med: user can break into calls on other telephones with low and
medium-level protection
High: user can break into calls on all other telephones with this feature.
HF answerback <checkbox> Defines whether you can automatically answer a voice call without lifting the
receiver or pressing the Handsfree button.
Note: The feature is not available to model 7000 and 7100 telephones and
wireless handsets.
Speaker volume: Note that the speaker volume on the telephone returns to
the default volume setting determined by the telephone for each new
handsfree call.
DND on Busy <checkbox> Defines whether an incoming call rings if you are already on another call.
Digital doorphone note: Before you install the doorphone hardware, ensure
this is not selected in the DN record you want to use for the doorphone.
Paging <checkbox> Defines whether you can make paging announcements from this telephone.
Digital Doorphone note: Before you install the doorphone hardware, ensure
this is selected in the DN record you want to use for the doorphone.
Auto hold for incoming <checkbox> Not selected - If the telephone is active when a page comes in, the page will
page be put on queue until the user hangs up.
Selected = If the telephone is active when a page comes in, the call is
automatically put on hold and the page proceeds.
Note: 7XXX digital phones:
• Condition: This setting is enabled, active call is on mute when the page
comes in.
• Results after page: the call comes off hold, but is no longer muted.
Priority call <checkbox> Defines whether this telephone can interrupt calls or override Do Not Disturb
at another telephone.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


104
Section 2: DN records DN records parameters

Table 7 Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities panel fields (Continued)

Attribute Values Description

Auto hold <checkbox> This setting determines if the system will automatically put an active call on
hold if you answer or initiate another call.
If you do not select this box, the system drops the active call, unless you
press the HOLD button first, if you answer a call or initiate another call.
A selected box is the default.
The user can change the Auto hold setting at their telephones by pressing
FEATURE 73.
SWCA note: Ensure this setting is selected for any telephones with
configured System wide call appearance (SWCA) keys. Refer to “Sharing
calls by parking on SWCA buttons” on page 174.
Allow redirect <checkbox> Define whether this telephone will allow assigned lines to be redirected.
This must be selected to allow call forwarding outside the network (external
call forward), including calls to a centralized voice mail system over a private
network.
Redirect ring <checkbox> Define whether the telephone rings briefly when a call on one of its lines is
redirected by the Line Redirection feature (FEATURE 84).
Also refer to “Trunk/Line Data, main panel” in the BCM50 Networking
Configuration Guide (Redirect to: for lines).
Receive short tones <checkbox> Analog equipment that is connected to the system with an internal or external
analog terminal adapter (ATA2), responds only to tone dialing signals.
If you have analog equipment connected to a station port, select this setting.
Otherwise, do not select Receive short tones.
OLI as Called Number ISDN. feature has been removed
Silent monitor <checkbox> On two-line display telephones only, you can choose whether the telephone
supervisor can be used to allow the Silent Monitor feature. Select the checkbox to allow
this feature on this telephone.
Refer to “Silent Monitor” on page 28 for information about setting up the
system settings for the Silent Monitor feature, including determining how
many telephones can be allowed to use this feature. Refer to “Monitoring
individual calls” on page 61 for instructions about using FEATURE *550.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


105
DN records parameters Section 2: DN records

Capabilities and Preferences - Preferences tab

The Preferences headings allow you to program the same settings that users can perform at their
telephones and the settings for configuring a telephone as a hotline. The set-based options are only
available to digital phones and IP telephones.

Figure 7 Capabilities and Preferences - Preferences tab panel

Table 29 describes the headings found on the User Preferences panel.

Table 8 Capabilities and Preferences - Preferences panel fields

Setting Values Description

Language Languages displayed Choose the language for the telephone display prompts.
are based on
telephone capabilities
and system software
Dialing options Standard dial Determine how the telephone handles dialed information.
Automatic dial Standard: Pick up the receiver and dial.
Pre-dial Automatic dial: Use for devices like fax machines where you want
the number to dial out without external cues.
Pre-dial: Dial the numbers, then pick up the receiver to allow the
telephone to dial the number.
Note: Not all devices show all three options.
Contrast 1 through 9 Adjust the contrast of the display.
Ring type 1, 2, 3, or 4 Select a distinctive ring pattern type for the telephone.
Default is 1.
Distinct rings in use read only This read-only field indicates the distinct ring patterns are currently
in effect, if any, on any lines, telephones, or Hunt groups on the
system. Refer to the Warning below.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


106
Section 2: DN records DN records parameters

Table 8 Capabilities and Preferences - Preferences panel fields (Continued)

Setting Values Description

Warning:
If you assign a distinctive ring pattern to a telephone, and that distinctive ring pattern has
already been assigned to a line, all lines with that ring pattern will be reset to None.
If you assign a distinctive ring pattern to a line, and that distinctive ring pattern has already
been assigned to a telephone, all telephones with that ring pattern will be reset to pattern 1.
You can also assign a distinctive ring pattern to a Hunt group.

Aux. ringer <checkbox> Determine whether an auxiliary ringer (if installed) rings for
incoming calls at this telephone.
Digital Doorphone note: Before you install the hardware, ensure this
is setting is not selected in the DN record you want to use for the
doorphone.
Call log options No autologging Select how you want the telephone to handle logging calls.
No one answered No autologging: No calls are automatically logged.
Unanswered by me
Log all calls No one answered: Unanswered calls are not logged.
Unanswered by me: Unanswered calls are not logged.
Log all calls: All calls are noted in the call log.
Also refer to: “Call log” on page 177.
Available log space <read-only> This setting indicates the total amount of space available for call
logging on the system.
Reset Call Log <button>
Password
Hotline type: None This feature allows you to define a telephone number that
Internal automatically dials when you lift the receiver or press the Handsfree
button on a telephone.
External
Internal DN:* Define the internal telephone you want to access.
Direct dial set DN:* The DN of the telephone that gets automatically dialed when
the user picks up the handset.
Direct dial set: Will automatically dial a telephone on the system
defined as a direct dial telephone (direct dial access code). Note: If
the direct dial telephone is actually on a remote node of the
network, ensure that the correct line pools have been assigned to
the telephone to properly route the call.

External External number Enter the complete call number for the external telephone you want
to access.
Facility Pool:A Enter the line you want the call to use. (This cannot be a target
Use prime line line.)
Use routing table Pool:A Refer to the line pool assignment for this telephone.
Use prime line: Refer to the General record for this telephone.
Use routing table: Refer to the routing tables. The routing code for
that table must be part of the External number.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


107
DN records parameters Section 2: DN records

Capabilities and Preferences - ATA settings tab

Analog telephones have some settings that are specific to the analog connection. An analog
telephone can be connected to the system directly through an analog modem, indirectly to a digital
modem through an ATA2, and indirectly through a FEM (no longer supported) if the analog
module is on a legacy Norstar system. These settings apply only when the DN record Model field
is set to Other.

Figure 8 Capabilities and Preferences - ATA Settings panel fields

Use the information in Table 30 to configure ATA settings.


Table 9 ATA settings

Attribute Values Description

ATA answer 3, 5, 7, 10 Select the length of delay between the last digit you dial and when the ATA2 device
timer is ready to receive DTMF tone.
ATA tones <checkbox> Not selected: No tones occur when a message is received (use for data equipment).
Selected: Tones occur when a message is received (use for analog telephones).
ATA use On site Select the location of the ATA2.
Off site Note: Set the field to Onsite for all installations except devices on a long loop. Set
the field to Offsite to increase the audio level to devices that are remote to the
ATA2. This field has no effect for ASM and ASM8+ devices.
Msg Indicate None Tone sends a Message Tone through the telephone receiver when you receive a
Tone message.
Lamp turns on the Message Lamp when you receive a message.
Lamp
ATA Device Modem Default: Modem
Telephon Devices connected to the system through an ATA can have connectivity issues over
BRI/PRI lines. To alleviate this, you can specify the type of device attached to the
analog line.
Modem supports 3.1 kHz audio, which requires a higher quality of service on the
ISDN trunks which modems and FAX machines require for reliable information
transfer. If the trunks cannot provide the higher level of service, the call will fail.
Telephon supports speech paths, which require less quality on the trunk; if used for
FAX and/or modem, information transfer would be unreliable.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


108
Section 2: DN records DN records parameters

Table 9 ATA settings (Continued)

Attribute Values Description

Disconnect <check box> Default: not selected


Supervision If you have a modem or fax machine that does not automatically disconnect when
(GASM only) the caller disconnects, you can set this field to Y and the system will disconnect the
line from the device once it receives the disconnect signal from the far end. This
feature is supported only by ASM8+ modules.
Note: The line must be configured as supervised/guarded). Refer to “Properties” in
the BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide.

Capabilities and Preferences - IP Terminal Details tab


This is a single-terminal display of the terminal information that is also shown in the Telephony
Resources IP Terminal panel. Refer to “IP telephone set details” in the BCM50 Networking
Configuration Guide for a detailed description of the fields and buttons on this panel.

Figure 9 Capabilities and Preferences - IP Terminal Details panel

The one unique field is described in Table 31.

Table 10 Capabilities and Preferences - IP Terminal Details, DN-unique field

Keep DN alive <checkbox> This feature is only relevant to the Nortel Networks IP telephones (2XXX).
When selected, the system retains the IP telephone DN record even if the IP
telephone becomes disconnected. This occurs as long as the IP telephone
has completed the bootup process. This allows DN-specific features like Call
Forward No Answer and Call Forward on Busy to continue to function even if
the telephone is disconnected.
WARNING: If the system is reset, and the IP telephone is disconnected, the
feature remains inactive until the telephone is reconnected.
Note: A delay of about 40 seconds occurs between when the IP telephone is
disconnected and when Keep DN alive becomes active. During this period,
incoming calls get a busy signal or are rerouted to the prime set, depending
on system programming. The delay also occurs when the IP telephone is
reconnected to the system.
If not selected, the DN record becomes inactive if the IP telephone is
disconnected, which produces a Not in Service prompt if any of the
special features, such as Call Forward, are invoked.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


109
DN records parameters Section 2: DN records

Also refer to:


• “Moving IP telephones” on page 237.

Capabilities and Preferences - Button Programming tabs


The Button Programming and CAP/KIM Button Programming tab panels allow you to program
the buttons on a telephone with internal and external autodialers and with programmed feature
keys.
You also can use these panels to remove programming from a button, making it blank.

Figure 10 Button Programming and CAP/KIM Button Programming tabbed panels

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


110
Section 2: DN records DN records parameters

Assigned lines, Hunt group designators, answer DNs buttons, intercom buttons, and handsfree
buttons cannot be changed through these panels. They appear in read-only format. ISDN terminals
do not have feature buttons that are programmable through this heading.

Table 32 describes the possible settings for telephone buttons.

Table 11 Button programming fields

Setting Values Description

Model 7100 If you have not yet attached a telephone, choose the model of
7208 the telephone. This will create a number of defaults based on
the telephone capabilities.
7310/7316
This setting reflects whatever you set on the main table.
7316E
This field will be read-only if the telephone is already attached
7324 or registered to the system.
2004/2050 • 7310 also refers to the cordless 7406 cordless digital
2002 phones.
2001 • 7316E indicates both a stand-alone7316E digital phones
7316E and a 7316E digital phone connected to one or more KIMs
(Key Indicator Modules).
ISDN These telephones have their own set of DN records.
• ISDN refer to any ISDN equipment
Other This heading is used for the following types of devices:
• analog telephones
• Intl set (European only), is used for other types of
compatible telephones used in specific non-North
American markets, such as the 7000 digital phone.
Button Number (1-24) <1-XX> Choose the type of feature that you want to program on the
telephone buttons.
Blank means that nothing is programmed on the button.
Example: new KIM modules have all blank buttons when they
are first installed.
Function Blank Choose the type of feature that you want to program on the
Feature telephone buttons.
Internal autodial Blank means that nothing is programmed on the button.
Example: new KIM modules have all blank buttons when they
External autodial are first installed.
Value
Feature <feature code> Use the arrow to choose the feature you want to program on
the button.
Internal autodial <Internal DN> Enter the DN number for the internal telephone you want the
telephone to dial by pressing this button.
Digits
Feature <feature digits> This includes digits for such features as system speed dial
codes.
External autodial <dialing codes plus dialout Enter the complete dial sequence for the external call. This
string> sequence will depend on what you chose for the route in the
Value field.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


111
DN records parameters Section 2: DN records

Table 11 Button programming fields (Continued)

Setting Values Description

Option
Feature <feature options> This includes settings such as page zone.
External autodial Use prime line Choose the route the telephone will dial through.
facility Pool Prime line: the prime line assigned to the telephone
Use routing table Pool X: one of the pools assigned to the telephone
Use line Routing table: enter the routing code with the external phone
number
Use line X: one of the lines assigned to the telephone

Capabilities and Preferences - User Speed Dial tab


Speed dial numbers allow users to dial out a number with fewer button presses than dialing out the
entire dial string.

Figure 11 Capabilities and Preferences - User Speed Dial tab

Table 33 describes the fields on this panel.

Table 12 Capabilities and Preferences - User Speed Dial panel fields

Setting Values Description

Speed Dial <71-94> This is the number the user dials to dial out the number entered in the
Number External # field.
External # <external phone number> Enter the number the telephone will automatically dial when the user
speed dial code is entered.
Remember to include the access codes for the route you choose.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


112
Section 2: DN records DN records parameters

Table 12 Capabilities and Preferences - User Speed Dial panel fields (Continued)

Setting Values Description

Facility Use prime line Select the route you want the dialed number to take out of your system.
Use line Note: Any line numbers or line pool codes that you specify must be
Pool assigned to the telephone where the code is entered.
If you choose prime line, a prime line must be assigned to the telephone
Use routing table where the code is entered.
Refer to “Line Access - Line Assignment tab” on page 96.

Actions

Add 1. On the System DNs table (Capabilities and Preferences tab), choose the DN record where you
want to add User Speed dials.
2. Under the User Speed Dial Numbers table, click Add.
3. Enter the appropriate speed dial number.
4. Click OK.
5. On the User Speed Dial, click on the External # field beside the number you entered.
6. Enter an external number to dial.
7. Click on the Facility field beside the number you entered.
8. Enter how the number needs to be routed out of the system.
Delete 1. On the System DNs table (Capabilities and Preferences tab), choose the DN record where you
want to delete User Speed dial entries.
2. On the User Speed Dial Numbers table, the user speed dial code or codes that you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click OK to save changes.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


113
DN records parameters Section 2: DN records

Restrictions main tab


The Restrictions settings allow you to control callouts of certain number combinations. These
restriction filters are then assigned to lines and DN records, as required to prevent callers from
making certain kinds of calls from a specific telephone or from lines that are available at the
telephone.

Figure 12 Restrictions table panel

Table 34 describes the fields on this panel.


Table 13 Restriction table fields

Setting Values Description

DN <read only> Refer to “Main panel tabs: common fields” on page 93.
Model Refer to “Main panel tabs: common fields” on page 93.
DN Type <read only> Refer to “Main panel tabs: common fields” on page 93.
Set lock None Choose the option that sets the amount of programming and customizing the
Partial user can do with this telephone.
Full None allows access to all features.
Partial prevents: Full restricts all the Partial settings,
• programming autodial buttons plus:
• programming user speed dial • changing background music
numbers • changing Privacy
• programming feature buttons • changing Do Not Disturb
• moving line buttons • using Ring Again
• changing the display language • using Call Forward all calls
• changing dialing modes • using Send Message
(Automatic, Pre-, and Standard • using Trunk Answer
Dial) • activating Services
• using Voice Call Deny
• saving a number with Saved
Number Redial
Allow last number <checkbox> Allow or disallow access to the Last Number Redial feature.
Allow saved <checkbox> Allow or disallow access to the Saved Number Redial feature.
number
Allow link <checkbox> Allow or disallow access to the Link feature, which is a host signaling option.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


114
Section 2: DN records DN records parameters

Restrictions - Set Restrictions tab


You can assign restrictions that apply to a specific telephone record. You can also assign a
different restriction filter for Normal service and for one or more of six other schedules, which
would allow the user to have different access at different times of the day. See “System schedule
settings and services scheduling” on page 37 for more information about the schedules.

Figure 13 Restrictions - Set Restrictions tab panel

Table 35 describes the fields on this panel.


Table 14 Restrictions - Set Restrictions tab fields

Setting Values Description

Schedule Normal The Normal schedule runs when no other schedules are active.
<Sched 1-6> If schedules are being used, select the relevant schedule and enter the
required filter.
Use Filter <XX> Enter the restriction filter you want to be active for each schedule that you
use.

The table below provides a list of default restriction filters.


Table 15 Schedule filter defaults

Schedule Restriction filter (defaults) Schedule Restriction filter (defaults)


Normal 02 Schedule 4 00
Schedule 1 (Night) 11 Schedule 5 00
Schedule 2 (Evening) 12 Schedule 6 00
Schedule 3 (Lunch) 13

N0027146 [Publish Date]


115
DN records parameters Section 2: DN records

Restrictions - Line/Set Restrictions tab

The Line/set restrictions settings allow you to assign a restriction filter to a specific line for
outgoing calls at a specific telephone. This type of filter replaces any line or set restriction filters
that can otherwise apply. Line/set restrictions restrict the numbers the user can dial on a line, but
only from that telephone. The same line on another telephone can have different restrictions.

You can apply a different line restriction for normal service and for each of the six schedules.

Figure 14 Restrictions - Line/Set Restrictions panel

Table 37 describes the fields on this panel.


Table 16 Restrictions - Line/Set Restrictions fields

Setting Values Description

Line <XXX> This is a list of lines that are assigned to this telephone. Define a restriction
filter for each line under the schedules that you intend to use.
Restriction filters are defined under Restrictions.
Schedule Normal Always configure a Normal filter, as this schedule runs if there are no other
Night schedules running.
Evening If your system is using schedules, for instance, if you require different
restrictions on lines at different times of the day, choose an alternate
Lunch schedule that coordinates with the other programmed schedules on your
Sched 4 system.
Sched 5
Sched 6
Use Filter <XX> Enter the restriction filter you want to be active for this set on this line for each
schedule that you use.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


116
Section 2: DN records DN records parameters

N0027146 [Publish Date]


117

Section 2: DN records

Registering Nortel 20XX IP telephones

The Nortel 20XX IP telephones need to register with the system to be able to use the call features
and system features.

Prerequisite programming:

The following programming must be completed prior to performing this configuration:

• Numbering plan

• Lines programming

• Telephony system feature programming

• IP telephony network setup/prerequisites checklist

Determining the registration process


Registering 20XX IP telephones to the system is a two-stage process.

• First you set up the system programming to receive registration under Resources//Telephony
Resources//IP Terminal Global Settings tab. (“IP Terminal Global Settings” in the BCM50
Networking Configuration Guide)

On the IP Terminal Global Settings panel:


a Select the checkbox beside Enable registration.
b If you want the installers to use a password to configure and register the telephone, select
the checkbox beside Enable global registration password, and then enter a numeric
password in the Global password field.
c If you want the system to automatically assign DN records to the telephones, select the
checkbox beside the Auto-assign DNs field.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


118
Section 2: DN records Registering Nortel 20XX IP telephones

For the simplest installation possible, select Enable registration and


Auto-assign DNs, and leave the Global password field blank. IP telephones installed on the
system LAN will connect and boot-up without manual registration.

Security Note: Turn Registration and Auto-assign DNs off once the telephone(s) are
! registered. Nortel cautions that leaving your IP registration open and unprotected by a
password may pose a security risk.

• Secondly, you configure each telephone (“Configuring telephone settings” on page 119).
How you configure the telephones will depend on whether DHCP is active on the system.
— If DHCP (Distributed Host Control Protocol) service on the system is active or the
Customer DHCP server has been configured to hand out the specific system network
details, the IP telephone will automatically attempt to find the server.

After you register the telephone to the system, as described in “Registering the telephone
to the system”, the telephone assumes the parameters it receives from the system, which
are described in “Configuring telephone settings”.
— If DHCP is not configured to provide system information, or if you are not using DHCP
on your network, you need to configure your telephone parameters before the telephone
can register to the system. In this case, follow the directions in “Configuring telephone
settings”, and then follow any of the prompts that appear, as described in “Registering the
telephone to the system”.

Registering the telephone to the system


When you first connect the telephone to the IP connection, the following responses may occur:

• If the telephone is not yet registered, and if a password was entered in the Terminal
Registration panel, the telephone prompts you for that password.

• If Auto-assign DNs is not selected, the telephone prompts you for a DN. Refer to
“Configuring telephones: IP telephones” on page 125.

• If you are prompted for a password, enter the password and press OK.

• If you are prompted for a DN, enter the DN you want assigned to this telephone and press OK.
When the telephone registers, it downloads the information from the system IP Telephony record
to the telephone configuration record. This might include a new firmware download, which occurs
automatically. If new firmware downloads, the telephone display indicates the event.

Note: If the telephone displays a prompt that indicates it cannot find the server, follow
the instructions in Configuring telephone settings to enter the specific network path.
“Troubleshooting IP telephones” on page 122 describes other possible prompt messages.

After registration is complete, you do not need to go through the registration steps described above
unless you deregister the terminal.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


119
Registering Nortel 20XX IP telephones Section 2: DN records

Configuring telephone settings

If you are not automatically registered to the system, you can configure your telephone settings to
allow you to access a system on the network. You will also need to perform these steps if your
IP telephone is not connected to the same LAN to which the system is connected.

Follow these steps to access the local configuration menu on a 20XX IP telephone:

1 Restart the telephone by disconnecting the power, then reconnecting the power.
After about four seconds, the top light flashes and NORTEL NETWORKS appears on the screen.
2 When the greeting appears, immediately, and quickly, press the four display buttons, one
at a time, from left to right. These buttons are located directly under the display.

Display buttons

Press the button sequence within 1.5 seconds or the telephone will not go into configuration mode.

• If Manual Cfg DHCP(0 no, 1 yes) appears on the screen, you successfully accessed the
configuration mode.

• If any other message appears, disconnect, then reconnect the power, and try to access the
configuration mode again.
3 Enter the network parameters, as prompted.
As each parameter prompt appears, use the keypad to define values.
Use the * key to enter the period in the IP addresses.
Press OK to move forward.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


120
Section 2: DN records Registering Nortel 20XX IP telephones

Table 38 describes the values for each display parameter.

Table 1 IP telephone server configurations

Field Value Description

DHCP 0 or 1 Enter 0 if your network is not using a DHCP server to dispense


IP addresses. (Partial DHCP)
Enter 1 if your network does use a DHCP server.
If you choose to use a DHCP server rather than allocating static
IP addresses for the IP telephones, skip the remainder of this section.
If DHCP = 0
SET IP <IP address> The set IP must be a valid and unused IP address on the network that
the telephone is connected to.
NETMASK <subnet mask This is the subnet mask. This setting is critical for locating the system
address> you want to connect to.
DEF GW <IP address> Default Gateway on the network (i.e., the nearest router to the
telephone. The router for IP address W.X.Y.Z is usually at W.X.Y.1)
If there are no routers between the telephone and the system network
adaptor to which it is connected, (for example a direct HUB connection),
then enter the Published IP address of the BCM50 as the DEF GW.
If the IP telephone is not connected directly to the Published IP address
network adaptor, set the DEF GW to the IP address of the network
adaptor to which the telephone is connected.
If DHCP = 1
Manual Cfg? Full = 0 If you indicate DHCP for the telephone, but you want to enter static
DHCP: Partial = 1 IP addresses, choose 1 (Partial).
If you choose 0 (Full), the DHCP server will assign IP addresses that
are not static.
If DHCP = 0 or Partial
S1 IP <IP address> This is the Published IP address of the first system that you want to
register the telephone to.
S1 PORT Default: *7000 This is the port the telephone will use to access this system.
S1 ACTION Default: 1
S1 RETRY COUNT <digits between 0 Set this to the number of times you want the telephone to retry the
and 255> connection to the system.
S2 IP <IP address> This is the Published IP address of the second system that you want to
register the telephone to. It can also be the same as the S1 setting.
S2 PORT Default: *7000 This is the port the telephone will use to access this system.
S2 ACTION Default: 1
S2 RETRY COUNT <digits between 0 Set this to the number of times you want the telephone to retry the
and 255> connection to the system.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


121
Registering Nortel 20XX IP telephones Section 2: DN records

Table 1 IP telephone server configurations (Continued)

Field Value Description

VLAN 0: No VLAN Choose 0: NO VLAN if there is no VLAN on the network.


1: Manual VLAN If you do not have DHCP on the network, or if DHCP is supplied by a
2: Automatically remote server, select number 1 and enter the VLAN ID*.
discover VLAN If you have the system DHCP active on your system, select number 2 if
using DHCP you want DHCP to automatically find the VLAN assignment.
*VLAN is a network routing feature provided by specific types of
switches. To find out if VLAN has been deployed on your system, check
with your network administrator. If VLAN is deployed, the system
administrator responsible for the switch can provide the VLAN ID(s) for
your system.
Cfg XAS? 0: No (default) If you want the telephone to be able to connect to a Net6 service
1: Yes provider server, choose 1. You will then be prompted for an IP address
for the server.
* Firewall note: Ensure that the firewall filters are set up to allow IP traffic into and out of the system.

After you have entered all the configuration information, the telephone attempts to connect to the
system. The message Locating Server appears on the display. If the connection is successful,
the message changes to Connecting to Server after about 15 seconds. Initialization may take
several minutes. Do not disturb the telephone during this time.

When the telephone connects to the server and is ready to use, the display shows the time and date.
As well, the six keys at the top of the display are labelled.

If you experience problems with IP telephone registration, refer to the section: “Troubleshooting
IP telephones”.

Notes:

• If the DN record has not yet been configured, as will be the case with auto-assigned DNs, you
will only be able to make local calls, until other lines have been assigned in the DN record.
Refer to ....................................................

• If the telephone has not been registered before, you will receive a New Set message. Enter the
information, as prompted. Refer to “Registering the telephone to the system” on page 118.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


122
Section 2: DN records Registering Nortel 20XX IP telephones

Troubleshooting IP telephones

If the system is not properly configured, several messages can appear.


Table 2 IP telephony display messages

Message Description/Solution

SERVER: NO PORTS LEFT The system has run out of ports. This message will remain on the display until
a port becomes available and the telephone is powered down then powered
up. To obtain more ports, you may need to install additional VoIP keycodes.
See the BCM50 Keycode Installation Guide.
Invalid Server Address The S1 is incorrectly configured with the IP address of a system network
adapter other than the published IP address.
IP Address conflict The telephone detected that a device on the network is currently using the
IP address allocated to the telephone.
Registration Disabled The Registration on the system is set to OFF.
SERVER UNREACHABLE. Check that you have entered the correct Netmask and gateway IP addresses.
RESTARTING . . . If the settings are correct, contact your system administrator.

NEW SET The telephone has not been connected to the system before, and must be
registered.

Programming note: To see the configuration information for a telephone connected to the
system: When the telephone is not on a call, press the key (bottom-right corner of the
telephone), followed by the key (next to the key). The display will
automatically scroll through the configuration settings.

To see the Codec data for a telephone while it is on a call: Press the key, followed by the
key.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


123
Registering Nortel 20XX IP telephones Section 2: DN records

Operation issues

Here are a few possible issues you may encounter, including a description of what may cause
them, and how to troubleshoot the issue.

Table 3 IP telephone troubleshooting

Problem Suggested solution or cause

Telephone does not connect to If an IP telephone does not display the text Connecting to server
system within two minutes after power up, the telephone was unable to establish
communications with the system. Double check the IP configuration of the
telephone, and the IP connectivity to the system (cables, hubs, etc.).

Slow connection between the If the connection between the IP client and the system is slow (ISDN, dialup
handset and the system modem), change the preferred CODEC for the telephone from G.711 to G.729.
See “IP telephone server configurations” on page 120.

One-way or no speech paths Signaling between the IP telephones and the system uses the system port
7000. However, voice packets are exchanged using the default RTP ports
28000 through 28255 at the BCM50, and ports 51000 through 51200 at the IP
telephones. If these ports are blocked by the firewall or NAT, you will
experience one-way or no-way speech paths.
Firewall note: If you have the firewall filter set to Pass Outgoing and Block
Incoming Except IP Phones, this only allows IP telephony registration traffic
through, but blocks all other traffic, including H.323 calls on this interface. You
must still specify an H.323 rule to allow IP call voice traffic. Also, Registration
must be turned on in the Services, IP Telephony, IP Terminals, Nortel IP
Terminals, General page, before the telephone can access the system to
register.

Change the contrast level When an IP telephone is connected for the first time, the contrast level is set to
the default setting of 1. Most users find this value is too low. Therefore, after
the telephone is installed, use FEATURE *9 and use the UP or DOWN key to
adjust the contrast.

Block individual IP sets from If you want to block one or more IP telephones from calling outside the system,
dialing outside the system. use Restriction filters and assign them to the telephones you want to block.
Restriction filters are set up under Telephony, Call Security, Restriction Filters.
Restriction filters are discussed in the BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide.

Deregistering 20XX IP telephones


You can deregister selected 20XX IP telephones from the system, and force the telephone to go
through the registration process again.

Warning: After this feature is activated, all active calls are dropped.

To deregister a 20XX IP telephone from the IP record:

1 You can access the reset button from two locations:


• Resources//Telephony Resources//IP Terminal Details tab.
• Telephony//Sets//Active Sets//IP Terminal Status tab

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


124
Section 2: DN records Registering Nortel 20XX IP telephones

2 From the top list, select the IP telephone where you want to reset the password.
3 Click Deregister DN.
4 Reregister the telephone, as described in “Determining the registration process” on page 117.

Warning: After this feature is activated, all active calls are dropped.

Next step:

IP-specific features: “Global IP features” on page 223

Nortel IP telephones user cards: “IP Phone 2001 default buttons and descriptions”, “i2002 button
and light descriptions”,“i2004 button and light descriptions” in the BCM50 IP Telephony
Installatino and Configuration Guide.

General feature user guide: “Telephone features”

N0027146 [Publish Date]


125

Section 2: DN records

Configuring telephones: IP telephones

IP telephones have a very similar DN configuration to digital telephones. Refer to “Configuring


telephones: Digital telephones” on page 71 for detailed procedures.

There are several models of i-series telephones, and each telephone has a different number of
programmable buttons. Refer to the Nortel i-series telephone user cards for details.

Tasks: Set up IP telephones:

Determine the programming for individual IP telephones. Refer to “IP telephone DN record
overview” on page 126 and “Configuring an IP telephone DN record” on page 126.
Register each IP telephone to the system. Refer to “Registering Nortel 20XX IP telephones” on
page 117).

Prerequisite programming:

The following programming must be completed prior to performing this configuration:

• Numbering plan

• Lines programming

• Telephony system feature programming

• IP telephony network setup/prerequisites checklist

Programming references:

• “Installing Nortel IP telephones” on page 133

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


126
Section 2: DN records Configuring telephones: IP telephones

IP telephone DN record overview

Configuring an IP telephone DN record


On each panel on the DNs list, add or modify settings to customize the telephone operations.

See also: Labels and IP list


Table 1 Line Configuration

Affected field Setting Panel name and link to common procedures

Model 2004, 2002, or 2001 “System DNs - Line Access tab” on page 73
Name Unique to each handset
Line appearances Ring only (if not assigned to a “Line Assignment and Line Pools” on page 76
button)
Caller ID set Y (connected to target lines)
Answer DNs Ring only (if not assigned to a
button)

N0027146 [Publish Date]


127
Configuring telephones: IP telephones Section 2: DN records

Table 1 Line Configuration (Continued)

Affected field Setting Panel name and link to common procedures

Intercom keys At least one “Configuring Capabilities & Preferences” on page 78


Handsfree Auto “Configuring telephone capabilities” on page 79
Dialing Options Auto “Configuring preferences” on page 82
All other settings are variable, based on your system requirements.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


128
Section 2: DN records Configuring telephones: IP telephones

N0027146 [Publish Date]


129

Section 2: DN records

Setting up Central Answering Positions

A CAP (Central Answer Position) station acts as a central answering and monitoring point for a
group or a business.

Where:

• Element Manager: Telephony//Global Settings//CAP Assignment

• Set-based admin: **CONFIG//System Progrming//CAP/KIM assignment

Click on one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view:

Panels Tasks

“Configuring CAP assignments (eCAPs)” on page 130 “Programming CAP/KIM buttons” on page 132

“Managing lines on a KIM” on page 132

“T24 KIM initialization” on page 136

“T24 KIM coldstarts” on page 136

See also: “DN records parameters” on page 91


“Moving line buttons” on page 155
“Hunt Group members and lines” on page 53

Click on the navigation tree heading to access general information about user management.

CAPs become enhanced CAPs (eCAPs) when you identify the telephone DN under the CAP/KIM
assignment. You can configure a maximum of 12 CAPs as eCAPs on the system.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


130
Section 2: DN records Setting up Central Answering Positions

All CAPs can be programmed with quick dial numbers that allow the person at this station to
monitor and answer call traffic into the group. If you program the CAP to be an eCAP, lines, hunt
group appearances, and multiple target line appearances can also be moved to the module.

This section includes this information:

• “Configuring CAP assignments (eCAPs)” on page 130

• “Managing lines on a KIM” on page 132

• “Programming CAP/KIM buttons” on page 132

Figure 1 7316E with KIM

7316E digital phone


with one KIM

Configuring CAP assignments (eCAPs)


Use the CAP Assignment panel to designate 7316E+KIM units as eCAPs. This section describes
how to use the fields on the CAP Assignment table.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


131
Setting up Central Answering Positions Section 2: DN records

Figure 2 CAP Assignment panel

Follow these steps to create CAP stations:

1 Ensure that the telephone you want to use is configured and working on the system.
2 Ensure that the KIM has been installed on the appropriate telephone.
Refer to the installation user card that came with the module, if in doubt.
3 On the CAP Assignment table, click the line for the CAP you want to configure as an eCAP.
4 Select the Set DN field and type the DN for the telephone. not available on the screen

CAP notes:
• If CAPs are not designated as eCAPs, the system can support as many CAPs as the system
resources can support. The modules on these caps are referred to as ordinary KIMs (OKIMs),
and the buttons on the module only support memory button programming.
• A Station Auxiliary Power Supply (SAPS) is not required for 7316E digital phones attached to
four or fewer KIMs. If the KIMs are designated as eKIMs, you can only attach a maximum of
four modules to a 7316E. If the KIMs are designated as OKIMs, you can attach up to nine
modules to the 7316E. You must add a SAPS if more than four KIMs are added to the 7316E.
Note also that the line loop to the CAP cannot be greater than 304.8 m (1000 feet).
• If a KIM module is relocated with the telephone, the settings are retained on the module.
• Replacing CAPs: If you replace a legacy eCAP (7324+CAP) with a 7316E+eKIM, the line
assignments will be copied to the new telephone, but not to the eKIM. The telephone
programming will revert to the default settings for other buttons. Also, if you move an eKIM
from one 7316E to another, programming will not follow.
If you move an OKIM from one 7316E to another, the KIM will retain memory button
programming.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


132
Section 2: DN records Setting up Central Answering Positions

• Legacy equipment notes: A SAPS is required for 7324 digital phones that have one or more
CAP modules attached.

Programming CAP/KIM buttons


Designating features or autodial numbers to the eKIM buttons can be performed using the
CAP/KIM Button Programming screen.

To program module buttons, follow this procedure:

1 On the system DNs screen.


2 Select the Capabilities and Preferences tab.
3 Select the DN for the CAP you want to configure.
4 In the lower panel, click on the CAP/KIM Button Programming tab.
5 Select the line for the button number that you want to program.
6 Configure the feature or autodial on the button.
For a detailed description of each field, refer to “Capabilities and Preferences - Button
Programming tabs” on page 109.

Note: You cannot assign lines, target lines, or Hunt group indicators using button
programming. This must be performed through assigning lines to the telephone (“Line
Access - Line Assignment tab” on page 96), and, for hunt groups, configuring the
telephone as a Hunt group member (“Hunt Group members and lines” on page 53). These
lines are then either moved to the modules or overflow to the module if the telephone
buttons cannot accommodate the new settings.
You cannot assign Hunt group DNs as an autodial button on the KIM modules.

Managing lines on a KIM


If the 7316E+KIM is configured as an eCAP, you can move lines onto the module using
FEATURE *81 on the telephone. You can also reassign Hunt group designators to the KIM
module by using the same feature.

You can also force lines onto the KIM by assigning more lines than the telephone buttons can
support. Extra lines automatically flow over to the module, but they flow sequentially, starting on
the top left at button 01. Also, they overwrite any existing programming on the KIM, except
existing line or hunt group (KIM) assignments.

Any of the buttons on your KIM that do not have assigned lines can be programmed to dial
internal or external numbers automatically, or to access a feature. Refer to Programming CAP/
KIM buttons.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


133

Section 2: DN records

Installing Nortel IP telephones

A maximum of 90 IP telephones, including Nortel Networks 2050 IP Software Phones, and H.323
devices, can be connected on the BCM50, if the system resources support the deployment.
The Nortel Networks IP telephones (20XX) can be registered to the network by the end user or by
the administrator. If the end user is configuring the telephone, the administrator must provide the
user with the required parameters.

Before installing
Before installing 20XX IP telephones, ensure that:

• the telephone has the appropriate power supply for your region

• if powered locally, the installation site has a nearby power outlet;


otherwise, it can be powered through a Power Inline Patch Panel (PiPP)

• the installation site has a 10/100 BaseT Ethernet connection

Caution: Do not plug the telephone into an ISDN connection. This can cause severe
damage to the telephone. Plug the telephone only into a 10/100 BaseT Ethernet
connection.

• if you are using an IP telephone that does not have a 3-port switch, ensure you have 10/100
BaseT Ethernet connections for both the telephone and for your computer equipment.

Using a 3-port switch

In an office environment where a LAN network already exists, most computers will already be
connected to a LAN line. To avoid the necessity of installing duplicate network connections, you
can use a Nortel Networks 3-port switch for older model 2004 IP telephones. This switch allows
the telephone and computer to connect to the same network connection. For more information,
consult the 2004 setup card and the 3-way switch documentation.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


134
Section 2: DN records Installing Nortel IP telephones

The 2001, 2002, and newer models of the 2004 IP telephones have an adapter in the telephone
housing that replaces the requirement for this switch.

Connecting the 20XX IP telephones


Follow these steps to connect a Nortel 20XX IP telephone:

1 Connect one end of the handset cord to the handset jack on the telephone base.
2 Connect the other end of the handset cord to the handset.
3 Connect one end of a Cat-5 line cord with RJ45 connectors to the line cord jack on the
telephone base.
4 Connect the other end of the line cord to the Ethernet connection or to the 3-way switch
connector.

Note: Newer 20XX IP telephones have a three-way switch built into the telephone. Refer
to the installation card that comes with the telephone for specific connection directions.

5 Plug the AC Power adapter into the base of the telephone, and then plug the adapter into the
AC outlet.
Once the telephone is connected, refer to “Configuring telephones: IP telephones” on page 125.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


T24 Key Indicator Module
(KIM) Installation Card
The T24 Key Indicator Module (KIM) is an add-on device which provides 24 extra memory or line buttons
for the T7316E telephone. Up to nine KIMs can be connected to a T7316E telephone.

A Station Auxiliary Power Supply (SAPS) is required for T7316E telephones that have five to nine KIMs
attached. For SAPS installation instructions, refer to the SAPS Installation Card provided with the
SAPS kit.

Single T24 KIM installation Multiple T24 KIM installation

1 Position the metal hooks from the 1 Position the T7316E


left side of the KIM next to the telephone and KIMs
slots on the right side of the together. Align the hooks
T7316E telephone. on each KIM to the slots
on the next KIM.
Firmly press the T7316E and KIM Firmly press the T7316E
together. and KIMs together.

2 Slide the KIM down until it is 2 Slide the KIMs down until
aligned with the T7316E they are aligned with the
telephone. T7316E telephone.
T24 KIM Installation

3 Remove the stand 3 Remove the stands


Press here
from the T7316E from
to remove stand.
telephone. KIMs and
the T7316E Press here
telephone. to remove
stands.

4 Connect the KIM cord to 4 Connect each KIM cord to


the accessory connector the connector port on the
port on the T7316E next KIM in a daisy-chain
telephone. order.

KIM 3 KIM 2 KIM 1

Cord to
5 Replace the stand on the T7316E telephone to complete the 5 Connect the cord on T7316E
installation. the first KIM
to the accessory
connector port on the
T7316E
telephone.

KIM 1

6 Replace the stands on the KIMs and the T7316E


telephone to complete the installation.
136
Section 2: DN records KIM button number assignment

T24 KIM initialization

KIM indicators turn on and flash during the


first ten seconds after powering up. It can take B01 B13
up to five minutes for the KIM to initialize. B02 B14
B03 B15
B04 B16
The default setting for the programmable
memory buttons on the KIM is blank. The side B05 B17
illustration shows the button number B06 B18
assignment on a KIM. B07 B19
B08 B20
B09 B21
B10 B22

Troubleshooting Tip: An Addon Error B11 B23


B12 B24
message appears on the T7316E telephone
display and an error tone is
generated when there is a connector problem
with a KIM. Check that the KIM cord is properly inserted into the
accessory connector port of the T7316E telephone.

T24 KIM coldstarts

Internal autodial numbers can be automatically assigned to the programmable memory buttons on
the KIM when a coldstart is performed. Internal autodial numbers are assigned in ascending order
starting on the top left button (button 01) on the KIM. A coldstart must be performed during the
first ten seconds after powering up a KIM.

To coldstart an individual KIM To coldstart all KIMs

1 Unplug the T7316E telephone line cord, then 1 Unplug the T7316E telephone line cord, then reconnect it to
reconnect it to power up. power up.

2 While the indicators are 2 While the indicators are


flashing on the individual flashing on the first KIM
KIM, simultaneously press (next to the telephone),
the top two and the bottom two simultaneously press the
buttons on the lower top two buttons and the bottom two
button set of the KIM, as shown in buttons on the KIM, as shown in the
the illustration. illustration.

(buttons: 05, 12, 17 and 24). (buttons: 01, 12, 13 and 24)

1-800-4 NORTEL
www.nortelnetworks.com
TP PART NUMBER+version
N0027146 [Publish Date] Printed in Canada
137
Section 2: DN records

3 At the beginning of the coldstart, indicators beside each KIM 3 At the beginning of the coldstart, indicators beside each KIM
button will briefly flash starting at the bottom right button button will briefly flash starting at the bottom right button
(button 24). (button 24).

4 When the KIM coldstart is completed, the T7316E telephone 4 When the KIM coldstart is completed, the T7316E telephone
display automatically returns to the time and date. display automatically returns to the time and date.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


138
Section 2: DN records

N0027146 [Publish Date]


139

Section 2: DN records

Default memory button programming for telephones

Button programming allows you to program the buttons on a telephone with internal and external
autodialers and with programmed feature keys. Assigned line, Hunt group designator, answer DNs
buttons, intercom buttons, and handsfree buttons cannot be changed through button programming.
These latter features appear in read-only format on the Button Programming table. ISDN terminals
and wireless handsets do not have feature buttons that are programmable through this heading.

During startup, the installer chooses one of the available telephony template (PBX or DID). Each
profile has a default features set which assigns automatically to the programmable buttons on
telephones plugged into the system, unless you configure different settings in the DN record. The
default features are listed, by telephone model, in the following sections in this chapter.

• “Rules of default button assignment” on page 139

• “7316E digital phone button defaults” on page 141

• “7316 digital phone button defaults” on page 143

• “7406 digital phone button defaults” on page 146

• “7208 digital phone button defaults” on page 144

• “Model 7100 digital phone button defaults” on page 145

• “Model 7000 digital phone button defaults*” on page 145

• “IP telephone button defaults” on page 147

Rules of default button assignment


• Line and intercom buttons assigned by default templates can be changed in programming.
handsfree and answer DN buttons are not assigned by default. When these features are
programmed, however, they are automatically assigned to specific buttons.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


140
Section 2: DN records Default memory button programming for telephones

• Telephones can have a maximum of eight intercom buttons. When Answer DNs are assigned,
they appear above the handsfree button, if there is one, at the bottom right-hand corner on the
telephone. The model 7000 and 7100 digital phones and analog telephones are automatically
assigned two intercom lines.

• Default line button assignment starts on or near the top of the left column and descends.
Default button programming does not necessarily provide default line assignments.

• Line assignments can be moved by the user to more convenient buttons.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


141
Default memory button programming for telephones Section 2: DN records

7316E digital phone button defaults


The default button assignments for the 7316E depend on the template applied. Refer to your
Programming Records to identify the current button programming for each telephone or group of
telephones.

• This telephone has individual handsfree, mute and headset buttons, located under the dialpad.
Handsfree must be set to Auto for these buttons to work.

• The current incoming call on this telephone defaults to the voice path last used. For example,
if you answered the previous call using your headset, the next call will come in over your
headset.

• Line numbering starts on button 09.

Note: The 7316E digital phone buttons are mapped differently than the 7316 digital
phone buttons. Therefore, if you replace a 7316 digital phone with a 7316E digital phone,
the button programming reverts to the default settings for the 7316E, losing any keys
programmed by the user at the telephone. Also, settings that are copied from one
telephone to the other may be in a different location on the 7316E. This is consistent with
how the system behaves if you switch any telephone model for a different model on the
same connector.

Table 1 7316E digital phone upper button defaults

7316E digital phone upper button defaults

Btn # Btn #

Contrast 01 05 Blank

Show time 02 06 (DID only) Sys Park

Blank 03 07 Send Message

Blank 04 08 Speed dial

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


142
Section 2: DN records Default memory button programming for telephones

Figure 1 7316E digital phone lower button mapping

09 17
Table 2 7316E digital phone lower button defaults
10 18
7316E lower button defaults
11 19
Btn # PBX DID Btn # PBX/DID
12 20 09 Sys Park Target line 17 Call Timer
10 Saved No. 18 Ring Again
13 21
11 Call Fwd 19 DND
14 22 12 Pick-up 20 Transfer
13 Page 21 Last No.
15 23
14 Transfer 22 Voice call

16 24 15 Time/Date 23 Intercom
16 Receive Msg. 24 Intercom

N0027146 [Publish Date]


143
Default memory button programming for telephones Section 2: DN records

7316 digital phone button defaults


Button mapping for the 7316 digital phone is unique. Although the button programming follows
the 7310 digital phone button mapping, the 7316 does not have a second level on its upper button
group. Because of this, the numbering for the 7316 is not consecutive. As well, the top three
buttons on each column of the bottom button group refer to the 7310 upper button programming.
This means that line assignment starts on the fourth button down on the left column, rather than on
the top button, as it does with all other 7XXX digital phones. Refer to the diagrams below.
Internal autodial numbers are assigned to buttons 11, 13, 15, 17, 19, and 21 on the main button
group. Programmed external line buttons descend down the lower left buttons, starting with
button 01. When more than five external lines are programmed, assignment continues on the
lower right buttons, starting at button 06.

Note: The 7316E telephone buttons are mapped differently than the 7316 telephone.
Therefore, if you replace a 7316 telephone with a 7316E telephone, the button
programming will revert to the default settings for the 7316E.

Figure 37 shows the default button number assignments on the 7316 telephone.

Figure 2 7316 digital phone upper button defaults

7316 upper buttons (PBX and DID) default button settings

Btn # Btn #

Autodial to 227 23 31 Autodial to 231


Autodial to 228 25 33 Autodial to 232
Autodial to 229 27 24 Autodial to 239
Autodial to 230 29 26 Autodial to 240

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


144
Section 2: DN records Default memory button programming for telephones

Figure 3 7316 digital phone button assignment

11 17
Table 3 7316 digital phone lower button defaults
13 19
7316 lower button defaults
15 21
Btn # PBX DID Btn # PBX DID
01 06 11 Autodial 221 17 Autodial to 224
13 Autodial 222 19 Autodial to 225
02 07
15 Autodial 223 21 Autodial to 226
03 08 01 DND Target Line 06 Conference
02 Transfer 07 Last No. Redial
04 09 03 Call Forward 08 Intercom

05 10 04 Pick-Up 09 Intercom
05 Page-General 10 Handsfree

7208 digital phone button defaults


The default button assignments for the 7208 digital phones differ for the PBX and DID telephony
templates. Refer to Figure 39.

Figure 4 7208 digital phone button mapping

01
Table 4 7208 digital phone button defaults
02
7208 default button mapping
03 PBX Btn # DID
Pick-Up 01 Target line
04
Transfer 02 Transfer

05 Last No. Redial 03 Last No. Redial


Page-General 04 Page-General
06 Conference 05 Conference
Intercom 06 Intercom
07
Intercom 07 Intercom
08 Handsfree 08 Handsfree

N0027146 [Publish Date]


145
Default memory button programming for telephones Section 2: DN records

Model 7100 digital phone button defaults


The 7100 digital phone is a basic-function digital telephone with a single-line display. For all
templates assigned to 7100 digital phones, the one programmable button defaults to Last Number
Redial.
This telephone cannot use features that require a speaker, such as Page.
Note: The default Page button activates the External Page option (FEATURE 62).

Model 7000 digital phone button defaults*


Figure 5 7000 digital phone button mapping

This digital basic-function telephone has four


programmable memory keys which default to the
features shown in Table 46. This telephone has no
display and does not support features that require a
speaker or a display.
01
* Only available in limited markets.
02 Table 5 7000 digital phone button defaults

7000 button defaults


03
PBX DID Btn #
04 Last Number Redial 1
Call Forward 2
Transfer 3
Conference/Transfer 4

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


146
Section 2: DN records Default memory button programming for telephones

7406 digital phone button defaults


Figure 6 7406 digital phone button defaults

The 7406 cordless handset is based on the 7316 digital


phone button numbering. However, the 7406 handset only
has six memory buttons. These buttons map to specific
7316 button numbers: 01, 02, 03, 07, 08, 09.
Ensure that when you fill out the DN record, which shows
24 buttons for the 7316 digital phone, that you only
program these buttons. The handset can access any system
features except for features that require a speaker, such as
01 07 handsfree.
02 08
03 09 Table 6 7406 digital phone button defaults

7406 lower button defaults


Btn # PBX DID Btn # PBX/DID
01 DND Target line 07 Last No. Redial
02 Transfer 08 Intercom
03 Call Forward 09 Intercom

N0027146 [Publish Date]


147
Default memory button programming for telephones Section 2: DN records

IP telephone button defaults


The IP telephone 20XX models have fewer programmable buttons than the 7316 or 7316E, but
they have access to a feature menu through the Services key (FEATURE *900) that expands
quick access to call features. Additionally, IP telephones support the hotdesking feature, which
allows the user to transfer telephone settings from one IP telephone to another to allow mobility
without needing to relocate the physical telephone.

IP telephone 2004 and 2050 Software Phone button defaults

The 2004 and the 2050 telephones have six memory buttons beside a display that provides soft
labels for the buttons. These telephones also have six other buttons that can be programmed as
memory buttons without display.

Figure 7 2004/2050 default button programming

01 04
Table 7 2004 button defaults
02 05
03 06
2004 default button assignment

Btn # PBX DID

01 Call Forward Line XXX


02 Conference/Transfer
03 Last # Redial
11 12 04 Page - General
05 Intercom
07 08 09 10
06 Intercom
07 Blank
08 Voice mail login
09 Express Messaging
10 Service menu
11 Blank
12 Blank

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


148
Section 2: DN records Default memory button programming for telephones

IP telephone 2002 button defaults

The 2002 has four memory buttons beside a display that provides soft labels for the buttons. This
telephone also has five other programmable buttons with no display.

Figure 8 2002 default button assignment

01 03 Table 8 2002 button defaults


02 04
2002 default button mapping

Btn # PBX DID

01 Call Forward Line XXX


02 Conference/Transfer
03 Intercom
06 07 05
04 Intercom
08 09
05 Blank
06 Voice mail login
07 Express Messaging
08 Service menu
09 Blank

IP telephone 2001 button defaults


Figure 9 2001 default button formatting

The 2001 is a simple version of the IP telephone.


Feature None of the programmable buttons have indicator
Display menu displays, so all incoming calls must be set to ring
commands
only. Figure 44 shows the positions of the three
Directional programmable buttons and which button number
Services corresponds to each of the three buttons.
02
(programmable)
03 Mail box in Although two intercom lines are assigned to the
(programmable) telephone, there is no visible indicator of the lines,
Goodbye (Release)
but a light at the top of the telephone blinks. The user
Hold presses the Hold key to toggle between two active
01 Ringing call calls, or to put one call on hold to make a second
(programmable) call.

Handsfree and mute are not available, since this


telephone does not have an external speaker. It also does not support a headset. The only indicator
on the telephone is the message waiting indicator (MWI) lamp.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


149
Default memory button programming for telephones Section 2: DN records

Model 2001 feature buttons:

• Four display buttons appear under the telephone display screen. The first button defaults to act
as the Feature button (green button). The other buttons provide access to menu commands
that appear on the display, as with the other types of telephones on the system.

• The IP telephone Features list is accessible through the button that defaults to Services
(FEATURE *900). This button can be programmed to another feature.

• One of the buttons defaults to the voice mail login (FEATURE 981). This program can be
programmed to another feature, such as the dial string for a remote voice mail system.

• The Hold and Goodbye (release) features are automatically programmed above the Ringing
call button, which is also programmable. The Ringing call button (FEATURE 807) provides
call send and receive access, allows users to toggle between two calls using the Hold key, and
is required if the Conference feature is allowed on the telephone.

• The telephone has an additional five hidden button assignments that can be programmed with
Answer DNs or SWCA assignments. All assignments on the virtual buttons are ring-only.
SWCA calls are accessed by using the feature code for each assigned button

2001 default button mapping Hidden button assignments:


Btn # PBX DID Btn # PBX DID
01 Ringing Call (F807) 04* Blank
02 IP Services List (F*900) 05* Blank
03 Voice message access (F981) 06* Blank
07* Blank
08* Blank
* These buttons only support Answer
DNs or SWCA controls.

• There are only two directional buttons (Up and Down) on this telephone. These buttons allow
you to scroll through the Features list, which is access through the Services button or by
entering FEATURE *900.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


150
Section 2: DN records Default memory button programming for telephones

N0027146 [Publish Date]


151

Section 1
Features
This section contains the following topics:

• Telephony features (page 153)

• Using telephones for special features (page 181)

• Display prompts and messages (page 191)

• Feature configuration: Making calls (page 209)

• Global IP features (page 223)

• System features and feature codes (page 255)

• Setting up auxiliary features (page 233)

• Feature configuration: Answering calls (page 157)

• Relocating telephones (page 235)

• Defining region-based defaults (page 231)

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


152
Section 1: Features

N0027146 [Publish Date]


153

Section 3: Features

Telephony features

Feature programming has two aspects. Some features are set for all telephones/devices and some
features are set on an individual basis in the DN record.

These sections divide system features in terms of how they are used. Each feature section contains
both system programming and how the feature is used at the telephone.

• “Features to set up telephone set features” on page 153

• “Feature configuration: Answering calls” on page 157

• “Feature configuration: Making calls” on page 209

• “Global IP features” on page 223

• “Using telephones for special features” on page 181

• “Setting up auxiliary features” on page 233

Refer to the Telephone Feature User Guide for a quick reference about using the system features.

Also refer to:

• “System features and feature codes” on page 255 (quick reference list of codes)

• “Relocating telephones” on page 235

Features to set up telephone set features


These codes allow you to adjust features on how your telephone set works. These features are only
available to digital and IP telephones.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


154
Section 3: Features Telephony features

Contrast adjustment
Adjust the contrast on the telephone through the system:

DN record//cap and user pref//user pref//contrast

Adjust the contrast using the telset interface:

Terminals and Sets//User prefrnces//contrast

Adjust the contrast of your display at the telephone.

1 Press FEATURE *7.


2 Press a number from 1 to 9 (depending on your telephone).
3 Press HOLD to set your choice.

Select how you dial your calls


The system digital telephones provide three methods for dialing calls:

• Standard dial: allows you to make a call by selecting a line and dialing the number. If you
have a prime line, it is selected automatically when you lift the handset or press the handsfree
button.

• Automatic dial: allows you to dial a number without selecting a line. Your prime line is
selected when you start dialing a number. Your Prime line must be free to make a call.

• Pre-dial: allows you to enter a telephone number, check it, then change it before making the
call. The call does not dial until you select a line or line pool, or pick up the handset. You can
pre-dial both external and internal numbers. You must, however, select the correct type of line
(external or internal) for the type of number you have entered.

Programming:

• System settting: Note that not all telephones allow all three types of dialing.
DN record//user pref//dialing options

• Programming call dialing through the **CONFIG telset interface:


Terminals and Sets//User prefrncs//dialing opt’ns

• Programming call dialing on a telephone

1 Press FEATURE *82.


2 Press # to select the mode.
3 Press HOLD to store the mode.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


155
Telephony features Section 3: Features

Language choice
• Adjust display language through the system:
DN record//cap and user pref//user pref//language

• Programming language choices through the **CONFIG telset interface:


Terminals and Sets//User prefrncs//Language

• Adjust display language at the telephone:


— FEATURE *501 to select Primary Language for the telephone display.
— FEATURE *502 to select Alternate Language for the telephone display.
— FEATURE *503 to select Alternate Language 2 for the telephone display.
— FEATURE *504 to select Alternate Language 3 for the telephone display. (not available
in all country profiles)

You can block the user from using this feature keys by setting the set lock for the telephone to
partial or complete restriction. (Telephony//DN record//restrictions//Set lock)

Moving line buttons


Change the position of your line or hunt group line buttons.

1 Press FEATURE *81.


2 Press the line button that you want to move.
3 Press the button that you want to move the line to.
4 Press RLS.
The two buttons are exchanged.
5 Update the button label strip on your telephone.

Note: Line buttons cannot be exchanged with intercom, answer DN or


Handsfree buttons.

You can block the user from using this feature keys by setting the set lock for the telephone to
partial or complete restriction. (Telephony//DN record//restrictions//Set lock)

Receiver volume
• System setting: determine if the handset/headset volume returns to a volume level set by the
system or to the volume set by the user.
Telephony//Global Settings//Feature Settings//Receiver volume

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


156
Section 3: Features Telephony features

• At the telephone: Use the rocker switch under the dial pad to change the sound levels through
your handset. This also changes the volume levels during handsfree calls.

Programming note: Handsfree speaker volume returns to the default value set at the telephone
after each call ends.

Programming distinctive ringing


You can program a line or a telephone to use a distinctive ring when alerting at a telephone. Ring
types are ordered in a hierarchy, and a call that is coming in on a line with a higher priority ring
than what is assigned to the telephone, will use the line distinctive ring. If the telephone has the
higher ring priority, the call will use the ring defined by the telephone.

Distinctive ring can also be defined for hunt group calls.

• System settings for lines: Telephony//Lines//preferences//distinct rings

• Programming distinct rings for DN records: Telephony//DN records//Line access tab//


Preferences subtab

• Hunt group: Telephony//Hunt group//

• Through the **CONFIG telset interface:


Lines//Trunk/line data//Distinct ring
Terminals and Sets//Capabilities//Distinct ring
System progrming//Hunt groups//Distinct ring

• At the telephone (for set distinct ring, only):

1 Press FEATURE *6.


2 Enter the ring type number (1 to 4).
3 Press HOLD.

Ring volume
Adjust the volume of your telephone any time it rings.
Press FEATURE *80 until the ring is at the volume you want.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


157

Section 3: Features

Feature configuration: Answering calls

Calls coming into system telephones can be answered or handled in a number of ways.

This section contains:

• “Answering calls directed to your telephone” on page 157

• “Answering calls not directed to your telephone” on page 158

• “Configuring privacy” on page 162

• “Holding calls” on page 165

• “Parking or transferring calls” on page 167

• “Call information” on page 175

Answering calls directed to your telephone


If a call comes into a designated line button, you press that button to answer the call.

If there are no line buttons on your telephone or the call rings but no line buttons light up, you
answer the call in the same way, but do not need to press the line button to connect.

There are three ways you can choose to answer a call that rings at your telephone. You can:

• pick up the receiver

• press the handsfree button and speak through the external speaker.

Note: This feature is not available on all telephones. Refer to


“Configuring handsfree and handsfree answerback” on page 158.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


158
Section 3: Features Feature configuration: Answering calls

• answer through a headset.

Note: This feature is not available on all telephones.

Calls may also have special ring tones, depending on distinctive ring values for the lines and the
telephone. Refer to “Programming distinctive ringing” on page 156.

Configuring handsfree and handsfree answerback


Ensure that handsfree (HF) is enabled for any telephone that you want to allow users to use the
telephone speakers or a headset.

Ensure HF answerback is enabled for any telephone that you want to allow users to answer a call
without picking up the handset. This feature must be enabled if there is a headset.

This feature is set on a per-telephone basis through the Element Manager:

1 Under Telephony//DN record, select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to
enable/disable handsfree.
2 Click the Capabilities & Preferences tab.
3 In the bottom frame, click on the Capabilities tab.
4 Set the Handsfree and HF answerback fields.

Handsfree speaker volume: The handsfree speaker volume returns to the telephone volume
default setting after a call is released.

Listen to a call as a group: This feature (FEATURE 802) allows more than one person to listen
to a telephone, without the caller hearing everyone in the group (the handset is offhook).

For general information about how handsfree and mute works, refer to the overview information.

Through the **CONFIG telset interface

Terminals and Sets//Capabilities//Handsfree and HF Answerback

Answering calls not directed to your telephone


There are a number of features you can use to pick up incoming calls that do not come directly to
your line or intercom buttons.

This section contains the following features:

• “Call Queuing” on page 159

N0027146 [Publish Date]


159
Feature configuration: Answering calls Section 3: Features

• “Directed Pickup” on page 159

• “Pickup Group” on page 159

• “Answer DNs” on page 161

Call Queuing
This feature allows you to answer the next incoming call based on call priority.

To use call queuing: Press FEATURE 801.

Directed Pickup
This feature allows a user to answer any ringing telephone in the system.

Enter FEATURE 76 and the DN of a ringing telephone to answer any telephone in the system.

Enabling the feature:

On the Feature Settings list (Telephony//System settings//General), enable the checkbox to enable
the feature for the entire system.

Pickup Group
This feature allows the user to answer calls on another telephone in the same pickup group.

Putting a telephone in a pickup group

1 Under Telephony//DN record, select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to
enable/disable Pickup Group.
2 Click the Capabilities & Preferences tab.
3 In the bottom frame, click on the Capabilities tab.
4 In the Pickup Group field, choose a group number.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


160
Section 3: Features Feature configuration: Answering calls

Using the feature

Enter FEATURE 75 and the external call that has been ringing the longest will connect.

Trunk Answer

This feature is only active when a ringing service schedule is running. It allows a user to answer a
ringing call in any area in the system from any telephone in the system. The line being answered
does not have to appear or ring at the telephone being used to answer the call.

Press FEATURE 800.

Allowing trunk answer

1 Assign the telephone to a ringing group.


2 Create a ringing group schedule, if necessary.
When the schedule is active, this feature is active.

Blocking user access

You can block the user from using this feature keys by setting the set lock for the telephone to
complete restriction. (Telephony//DN record//restrictions//Set lock)

1 Under Telephony//DN record, select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to
restrict trunk answer.
2 Click the Restrictions tab.
3 Click the Set restrictions tab in the bottom frame.
4 Beside the appropriate schedule, enter the filter that creates complete restriction.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


161
Feature configuration: Answering calls Section 3: Features

Answer DNs
Telephone DNs can be assigned to indicator buttons on other telephones to provide backup
answering. You can assign a maximum of eight answer DNs to a telephone. You cannot assign
Answer DNs to analog telephones or Model 7000 or 7100 telephones.

Determining which calls alert

You can also determine which calls alert at Answer DNs.

Under Telephony//System//General, beside Answer key, choose the level of support. Refer to
“Answer DN answer key levels” on page 22.

Warning: This setting affects all Answer DNs on the system. This is important to
note, as some features, such as Hunt group overflow, require the setting to be
either Enhanced or Extended. On the other hand, if you assign Answer DNs to
Call Center telephones, this setting must be set to Basic. Therefore, you must
coordinate how your system will use Answer DNs.

Assigning Answer DNs to telephones

Answer DNs are assigned on a per-telephone basis by the system administrator.

1 Ensure that the telephone you want to assign with Answer DNs has available memory buttons
with indicators.
2 Under Telephony//DN records, choose the DN record for the telephone where you want to add
Answer DNs.
3 In the bottom frame, click the Answer DNs tab.
4 Use Add to enter a valid DN and indicate how the call alerts at the telephone.
5 Click OK to save the record.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


162
Section 3: Features Feature configuration: Answering calls

Answering a call coming to an Answer DN

The Answer DN button presents an incoming call as a flashing indicator.

To answer the call, pick up the handset, use handsfree or headset, and press the button beside the
indicator. The call is transferred to your telephone, freeing up the line on the originating telephone.

Note: The Answer DN also can be used as an autodial button to the


assigned telephone. The indicator beside the Answer DN button must be
idle to allow this feature.

Note: If call logging is enabled for the telephone, then calls received
through Answer DN are logged at the receiving telephone that picks up
the call.

Configuring privacy
To maintain your privacy or if you do not want to be disturbed, you can choose not to answer a
call, or you can use one of the features described below:

If you choose not to answer the call, the Delayed Ring Transfer setting determines how many rings
occur before the call is transferred to the prime telephone. (Telephony//System//General//)

This section includes the following information:

• “Do Not Disturb” on page 162

• “Turn Privacy on or off” on page 164

• “Intrusion controls” on page 165

Do Not Disturb
Forward your calls to a designated prime telephone when there is no other telephone assigned with
the line. An internal caller will receive a display indicating that the telephone has Do Not Disturb
active. They can either call back or use the Priority call feature to override the feature.

Allowing Do Not Disturb on a telephone

This feature is programmed on a per-telephone basis.

1 Under Telephony//DN record, select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to
indicate a ring tone.
2 Click the Capabilities & Preferences tab.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


163
Feature configuration: Answering calls Section 3: Features

3 In the bottom frame, click on the Capabilities tab.


4 Beside Redirect Ring, indicate Y.

Using the feature

Press FEATURE 85 to activate the feature.

Use FEATURE #85 to cancel DND.

Do Not Disturb also prevents voice calls from alerting at your telephone. Voice calls appear as
normal intercom calls. Use FEATURE #85 to cancel DND.

Blocking user access

You can block the user from using this feature keys by setting the set lock for the telephone to
complete restriction. (Telephony//DN record//restrictions//Set lock)

Creating a short ring to indicate an incoming call:

DND on Busy

When you are busy on a call and a second call comes in, your telephone alerts you to the second
call with a light ring. If you find this second call ring disruptive, assign Do Not Disturb (DND) on
Busy to prevent a second call.

If this feature is active, the line indicator for an external incoming call flashes, but your telephone
does not ring.

• Internal and private network callers hear a busy tone instead of ringing when you are on the
telephone.

• External callers are transferred to the prime set used in your system or to your voice mail.
Forward on Busy takes priority over DND on Busy. If an external call uses a target line, the
call is processed according to the programming of the target line. If the target line is busy, the
caller hears a busy tone or routes the call to the prime set for the target line or to the voice mail
system, even if there is DND on Busy programming.

Programming a telephone for DND

This feature is programmed on a per-telephone basis.

1 Ensure that target lines are programmed to route the unanswered call correctly.
2 Under Telephony//DN record, select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to
reroute second calls.
3 Click the Capabilities & Preferences tab.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


164
Section 3: Features Feature configuration: Answering calls

4 In the bottom frame, click on the Capabilities tab.


5 Beside DND on busy, indicate Y.

Turn Privacy on or off


When you have lines assigned to more than one telephone, anyone with the line appearance can
take a call, or join a call in progress. To provide exclusive access for a user, you can program
privacy on a line, in which case, only one person at a time can use the line.

Programming privacy on a line

The privacy setting only applies to lines that are individually assigned to telephones.

Lines in line pools do not have this feature. Target lines show the feature as available, but the
feature does not work in the same way as for PSTN lines.

1 Under Telephony//Lines// choose the line for which you want to assign privacy.
2 In the bottom frame, click the Properties tab.
3 Beside Trunk Mode, choose the Private listing from the dropdown box.

Programming a line to automatically enable privacy

You can program some lines to automatically make a call private.

1 Under Telephony//Lines, select the line record for the line for which you want to automatically
enable privacy.
2 In the lower frame, click the Properties tab.
3 Beside Auto Privacy, indicate Y.
4 If the line is part of a line pool, ensure that all other lines in the pool also have this field
enabled.

Using the Privacy feature

Press FEATURE 83 to change the privacy setting on the line.

• If a line normally has privacy, this permits another telephone that shares the line to join your
call by selecting the line while you are using it.

• If a line normally has privacy disabled, this prevents another telephone that shares the line
from joining your call by selecting the line while you are using it.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


165
Feature configuration: Answering calls Section 3: Features

• The privacy setting is re-established once you end your call or when you enter the Privacy
feature code again.

Note: Privacy control cannot be used for internal or conference calls.

When another telephone joins a call on a non-private line, the participants on the call hear a tone,
and a message appears on the display.

Blocking user access

You can block the user from using this feature keys by setting the set lock for the telephone to
complete restriction. (Telephony//DN record//restrictions//Set lock)

Intrusion controls
If your system is part of a private network that uses the Meridian call attendant on a centralized
voice mail system, the attendant can use the break-in feature to interrupt a call, regardless of any
other settings on your line. The exception is if you have a higher intrusion priority than the
attendant. If this is the situation, the attendant would be forced to camp the call at your telephone
or redirect the call elsewhere in the system.

Setting intrusion controls

This feature is set on a per-telephone basis:

1 Find out what intrusion level the attendant has.


2 Under Telephony//DN record, select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to
change the intrusion level.
3 Click the Capabilities & Preferences tab.
4 In the bottom frame, click on the Capabilities tab.
5 Beside Intrusion, indicate a number that is higher than the attendant intrusion value.

Holding calls
After you answer a call, you may want to transfer the call, look up some information, or answer
another call. You can use the Hold feature to park the call on your telephone for a period of time.

This section includes the following information:

• “Using Hold” on page 166

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


166
Section 3: Features Feature configuration: Answering calls

• “Hold automatically (Auto Hold)” on page 166

• “Hold a call exclusively” on page 167

Using Hold
Put a call on hold by pressing HOLD.
If you have system wide call appearance (SWCA) keys defined, this might also park the call on a
SWCA key and allow others who have the same SWCA keys defined to pick up the call. Refer to
the SWCA section for more details.

To retrieve the call, press the held line button or press the Hold button a second time if there is no
line button.

There is no system programming for this feature. It is always active if the telephone has a Hold
button.

Hold automatically (Auto Hold)


A line or the telephone can be programmed to automatically put an active call on hold while
answering another call or making a call.

Model 7100 and 7000 telephones, which do not have line keys, also use the HOLD key to toggle
between active calls.

FEATURE 73 activates this feature. FEATURE #73 cancels the feature.

Programming (Full) auto hold on a line

1 Under Telephony//Lines// select the line record for which you want to enable Full auto hold.
2 On the bottom frame, under the Properties tab, enable the Full Auto Hold field.

Programming auto hold on a telephone

1 Under Telephony//DN record, select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to
enable auto hold.
2 Click the Capabilities & Preferences tab.
3 In the bottom frame, click on the Capabilities tab.
4 Beside Auto Hold, indicate Y.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


167
Feature configuration: Answering calls Section 3: Features

Hold a call exclusively


You can put a call on Exclusive Hold so that you can retrieve it only at your telephone.

FEATURE 79 or FEATURE HOLD

There is no system programming for this feature.

Parking or transferring calls


Calls coming in can be transferred after they are answered, or automatically transferred if they are
not answered at the target telephone.

These features include:

• “Transfer (answered) calls” on page 168

• “Transfer (unanswered) calls” on page 169

• “Line redirection” on page 169

• “Call forward (unanswered) calls” on page 170

• “Camp-on” on page 172

• “Call Park” on page 173

• “Callback” on page 174

• “Sharing calls by parking on SWCA buttons” on page 174

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


168
Section 3: Features Feature configuration: Answering calls

Transfer (answered) calls


When you answer a call, you can transfer the call either to a telephone within the system, or to a
telephone external to the system, such as a receptionist on another system in a private network.

Note: You may not be able to transfer a call on an external line to an external telephone,
depending on the capabilities of the lines.

Setting up a transfer callback timer:

If an external call is transferred to a busy internal or network extension, or is not answered after a
few rings, the call automatically rings you back. A system timer determines how long the system
will wait for a transferred call to be answered before it returns the call to the original answering
telephone.

System settings: Transfer callback timeout

Using the Transfer feature:

1 Make or answer a call.


2 Press FEATURE 70. The call is put on temporary hold.
3 Enter the number of the person to whom you want to transfer the call.
4 Stay on the line if you wish to speak to the person first.
5 Press RLS to complete the transfer.

Cancel feature: FEATURE #70

N0027146 [Publish Date]


169
Feature configuration: Answering calls Section 3: Features

Transfer (unanswered) calls


If some of the telephones are not using call forward to a voice mail system, you can program the
system to forward unanswered external calls to a designated prime telephone.

sysfeature: Delayed ring transfer ... set number of rings

Line redirection
When you answer a call, you can redirect the entire line to an external number. Once redirected, all
calls coming into that line are directed to the remote telephone. You can configure a tone to sound
when a call comes in on the line and is transferred.

You can also redirect individual lines from system programming. These lines must also be
undirected through system programming.

Redirecting lines from the system:

1 Lines record ... select the line you want to redirect (ensure that it is not in a line pool).
2 Select the field under Redirected to.
3 Enter a remote number. Ensure that the routing codes are included.
4 To turn off redirect, delete the remote number from the field.

Allowing redirect:

You can enable the redirect feature on a telephone-by-telephone basis:

1 Under Telephony//DN record, select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to
allow the redirect feature.
2 Click the Capabilities & Preferences tab.
3 In the bottom frame, click on the Capabilities tab.
4 Beside Allow redirect, type Y.

Setting a redirect tone:

You can cause a short ring to occur when a line is redirected using FEATURE 84. This is set for
each telephone.

1 Under Telephony//DN record, select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to
create a redirect tone.
2 Click the Capabilities & Preferences tab.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


170
Section 3: Features Feature configuration: Answering calls

3 In the bottom frame, click on the Capabilities tab.


4 Beside Redirect ring, type Y.

Redirecting lines at the telephone:

1 Enter FEATURE 84.


2 Enter the external telephone number where you want the call to transfer.

Cancel feature: FEATURE #84

Note: Model 7000, 7100 telephones and 2001 IP telephones do not support this feature.

Call forward (unanswered) calls


You can set up a telephone to automatically send calls to another telephone or to a voice mail box
if the telephone is not answered or if it rings busy. This feature can be programmed from the
system for each telephone, as well as by the user.

Programming call forward on the system

Using system programming you can forward calls internally or externally if the telephone is
unanswered, if the telephone is busy, or you can forward all calls to an external number.

1 Determine the dial string for the telephone to which the calls will be forwarded. Include
routing codes if the telephone is external to the system.
2 Under Telephony//DN record, select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to
configure call forward.
3 Determine when you want the calls to be forwarded, click on the field under the heading and
enter the dial string.
Call Forward No answer: Calls will be forwarded to the entered dial string after a set number
of rings.

Note: Ensure that this entry is less than the Delayed ring transfer setting
(system features).

4 Forward no answer delay: Enter the number of rings before the system forwards the call.
Call Forward on busy: calls are immediately forwarded to the entered dial string if the target
telephone is busy.
Forward all calls: All calls will immediately be forwarded to the indicated number.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


171
Feature configuration: Answering calls Section 3: Features

Call Forward and voice mail: If you want a voice mail system to pick up unanswered calls:

• use the internal number of your voice mail as the destination when you program Forward no
Answer and Forward on busy

• if your voice messaging system or service automatically retrieves calls, make the ring delay
greater than the delay used by your voice mail system

• if the voice mail system is on a remote system, ensure that the correct routing codes are added
to the voice mail forwarding dial string.

• if calls are being forwarded to telephones or voice mail outside the system, ensure that Allow
redirect is set for the telephones.

Using Call Forward at the telephone

1 Get the DN (internal) or the routing code and telephone number (external private network) for
the destination telephone.
2 Enter FEATURE 4.
3 Enter the dial string for where you want your calls transferred.

Cancel feature: FEATURE #4

Blocking programming at the telephone: You can block the user from using call forward for all
calls by setting the Set Lock restrictions for the telephone to complete restriction.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


172
Section 3: Features Feature configuration: Answering calls

Camp-on
Use this feature to reroute an answered call to another telephone, and park the call at that telephone
if all the lines to that telephone are currently busy. The target telephone displays a message,
indicating a camped call, and a tone occurs. When a line becomes available, the call is uncamped
and transferred to the available line.

Centralized voice mail, Meridian: If your system is part of a private network that uses the Meridian
call attendant as part of a centralized voice mail system, the attendant can use camp-on to camp a
call on any telephone in any system on the network.

Setting the timer

The system will camp a call for a specified length of time before it returns the call to the original
answering telephone.

Timers: Camp timeout

Using Camp-on

1 Enter FEATURE 82.


2 Dial the extension of the receiving telephone.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


173
Feature configuration: Answering calls Section 3: Features

Call Park
You can park a call on the system that can be accessed from any telephone on the system.

Calls are parked on a three-digit park code. The first digit of the code is a system access code. The
last two digits range from 01 to 25.

You also set a delay period for when the call returns to the telephone from which it was parked.
You can also determine the order used to assign the codes (Park mode).

Setting up the call park access code

This access code must be unique from any other access code. (Default: 1)

System//number plan//access codes

Setting up park delay

Determine how many minutes the system waits between parking a call and returning the call to the
original answering telephone.

System//general//Timers//park delay

Determine in what order the call park codes are assigned to calls

System//general//features//Park mode

Parking a call

1 Enter FEATURE 74.


2 The display shows a three-digit retrieval code. (*X01-X24).
3 Note the code and inform other users about the parked call.

*X is the assigned access code

Retrieving a parked call

1 On any system telephone, press an intercom button.


2 Dial the retrieval code. (*X01-X024)
On the model 7000, 7100 telephones and the 2001 IP telephones, lift the handset and dial the
retrieval code *X25.

*X is the assigned access code.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


174
Section 3: Features Feature configuration: Answering calls

Callback
When you direct an answered call to another telephone, the system monitors the call to make sure
it is picked up. If no one answers the call within a set length of time, the system returns the call to
you.

Programming:

system//general//timers ... transfer callback timer

Sharing calls by parking on SWCA buttons


System wide call appearance (SWCA) keys allow you to control call park and retrieval features on
any type of line, across the local system. These features expand the BCM50 call park and call
retrieve features by providing visual indications of the status of any call parked on a SWCA button
that has indicators. The calls can also be controlled by directly entering the SWCA feature codes.

You can use SWCA programming to define logical groups of telephones. Each group can be
assigned a set of the SWCA codes, which allows them to pass calls within the group. Each
telephone in the group also displays the current status of the call, so users can determine which
calls are being dealt with.

Configuring SWCA system controls

The following section describes how to perform the system configuration for the SWCA feature.

1 Check that Call Park Access code has a digit entered as a value.
Programming note: If the value is set to None, the SWCA feature does not work.
2 Choose one of the following configurations for the SWCA controls for your system:
Where: Configuration tab//Telephony//Global Settings//Advanced Feature Settings//SWCA
panel
Configuration One: If you want all incoming calls to auto-associate to SWCA assignments
on the receiving telephone:
a Auto-associate SWCA key to call: select Automatically - life of call
b Include I/C calls when auto-associating: select checkbox
c Invoke SWCA parking by Hold: select checkbox
d Include I/C calls when invoked by Hold: select checkbox

Configuration two: If you want incoming calls to auto-associate to SWCA assignments on


the receiving telephone, but you want calls on hold to remain on hold at the receiving
telephone, unless the user presses a SWCA button or enters a SWCA code:
a Auto-associate SWCA key to call: select Automatically - life of call

N0027146 [Publish Date]


175
Feature configuration: Answering calls Section 3: Features

b Include I/C calls when auto-associating: select checkbox


c Invoke SWCA parking by Hold: de-select checkbox
d Include I/C calls when invoked by Hold: not applicable in this configuration

Configuration three: If you want external incoming calls to auto-associate to SWCA


assignments on the receiving telephone, but you want all intercom calls to require manual
parking:
a Auto-associate SWCA key to call: select Automatically - life of call
b Include I/C calls when auto-associating: de-select checkbox
c Invoke SWCA parking by Hold: select checkbox
d Include I/C calls when invoked by Hold: de-select checkbox

Configuration four: If you want all calls to require the user to press a SWCA button or enter
a SWCA code:
a Auto-associate SWCA key to call: select either Manually- while parked or Manually - life
of call.
b Include I/C calls when auto-associating: not applicable in this configuration.
c Invoke SWCA parking by Hold: de-select checkbox.
d Include I/C calls when invoked by Hold: not applicable in this configuration.
3 Configure the SWCA keys to indicator memory buttons on the telephones.
Refer to “Programming memory buttons” on page 220 for details about programming memory
buttons at the telephone.
4 Label the buttons.
5 Let the users know how the SWCA buttons work and which SWCA codes are available to
them.

Note: A user can park a call on any SWCA code, but only SWCA codes assigned to a
telephone can be used to retrieve SWCA calls.

Using the SWCA

Refer to About System Wide Call Appearance (SWCA) keys features guide.

Call information
You can view, or track, call information using these features:

• “Malicious Caller ID (MCID)” on page 177

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


176
Section 3: Features Feature configuration: Answering calls

• “Call log” on page 177

Call Display Information


If the telephone is programmed to allow CLID, the telephone displays the name, number or line
name of a ringing or active call. If the call was redirected, redirection information can also be
viewed.

1 Press FEATURE 811.


2 Press # to move through the information displays.

Call Duration Timer


Briefly display the approximate length of your current or most recent call.

Activate feature: FEATURE 77

Time & date display


• Static display changes the first line of the display to show the current time and date (based on
system time).
Activate feature: FEATURE 806.
Cancel feature: FEATURE #806

• Active call display briefly displays the time and date.


Activate feature: FEATURE 803

N0027146 [Publish Date]


177
Feature configuration: Answering calls Section 3: Features

Malicious Caller ID (MCID)


This feature records caller information at the central office for the last external call on the active
ETSI ISDN line. This feature must be available from your service provider before you activate it
in your system.

If this service is active on the line, you must press FEATURE 897 within 30 seconds after a caller
hangs up, and before you hang up.

Allowing the feature on the system:

System//network features//ETSI//MCID

Call log
If your system has the appropriate equipment and you subscribe to the call information feature
supplied by your service provider, you can record information about calls received on an external
line. The line does not need to be assigned to the telephone that receives the call for it to be logged,
nor does an assigned line need to be a ringing line to log a call. ISDN service packages that come
with calling line identification (CLID) can supply the same feature. Refer to “Setting call log space
for the system” on page 177 and “Using the Call Log feature” on page 178.

Setting call log space for the system

The Call log space heading allows you to reallocate the Call log space equally to all telephones in
your system.

Warning: Use this heading only if you want to allocate an equal amount of log space
to all the telephones in your system.
Reallocating Call log space may destroy Call log data at telephones that lose space.
There are 600 Call log spaces available in the system. There are no spaces allocated by
default. Changing the space allocation using Log defaults defines the log space
available to all telephones in the system.

To reset call log space, follow these steps:

1 Click the keys beside Services, Telephony services, General settings, Feature settings.

2 Click on Call log space.

3 On the menu at the top, click Configuration.

4 Click Reset logs.


A dialog box appears.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


178
Section 3: Features Feature configuration: Answering calls

Table 50 explains the type of content for the two fields in the dialog box.

Table 1 Call log options

Attribute Value Description


Space per log <three digits> Type a three-digit number, for example, 020, to give each
set 20 spaces.
# of sets with Read-only Lists the number of sets that have logs.
logs If you click OK on this dialog, these logs will be deleted.

5 Click OK.
A dialog box appears, warning you that all existing logs will be cleared if you reset logs.
6 Click OK to reallocate the log space and clear all user logs.
Click Cancel if you do not want to clear user logs. In this case, the call log space will not be
reallocated.

Set call log options

DN record//User preferences//Set log options

Reset call log password

DN records//capabilities//Reset Call log password

Using the Call Log feature

This feature allows users to:


— manually log a call (FEATURE 813)
— delete old log items (FEATURE 815)
— view the log (FEATURE 812) or about a current call (FEATURE 811)
— view charges for a call (FEATURE 818)
— view details about a specific item
— make a call using a call log entry
Information such as long distance indicator and the caller name and number may not show in
the log. The appearance depends on the Call Display services provided by your local telephone
company and the local telephone company of the caller.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


179
Feature configuration: Answering calls Section 3: Features

Auto dumping (autodumping or bumping?see ftcodes)

Ensure that you have autodumping (FEATURE 815) enabled on any telephones that have call
logging active, otherwise, the logs fill up and subsequent calls do not get logged.

Logit
Store caller information for your current call in your Call Log.

Activate feature: FEATURE 813

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


180
Section 3: Features Feature configuration: Answering calls

N0027146 [Publish Date]


181

Section 3: Features

Using telephones for special features

You can program telephones and devices to perform specific feature services such as dialing an
emergency number as soon as the handset is picked up, or acting as the control center for the
system schedules. (“Special feature telephones” on page 181 and “Setting up a central reception
point” on page 184)

Special feature telephones


The following are telephones that are specifically programmed to perform a system operation.

Hotline telephone
You can define a telephone that automatically dials an emergency or direct number when the
handset is picked up.

Setting up the hotline

Dn record//Capabilities//hotline

Setting up the hotline for analog telephones (refer to)

See also:

• “Line Access - Line Assignment tab” on page 96

• “Assigning a pause for external dialing for data devices” on page 70 (analog devices)

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


182
Section 3: Features Using telephones for special features

Control telephone
This telephone allows you to control other telephones in the system by turning service schedules
off and on.

Defining a control telephone

You can define control telephones for lines, individual telephones, and for hunt groups.

lines//

DNs//

Also refer to:


• “System schedule settings and services scheduling” on page 37 (setting common features and
restriction and routing schedule features)

• “Creating ring groups” on page 43

• “Restrictions main tab” on page 113 (telephones)

• “Restrictions (Line & Remote)” in the BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide

• “Destination codes” in the BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide

Using the control telephone

• Show active schedules: Enter FEATURE 870.

• Ringing service:
a Enter FEATURE 871.
b Use NEXT to scroll to the schedule you want to active. On one-line display telephones,
press #.
c Press OK to select the schedule.
d Press QUIT to exit. (On one-line display telephones, press RLS).
Cancel feature: FEATURE #871

• Restriction service:
a Enter FEATURE 872.
b Enter the Service Control password.
c Use NEXT to scroll to the schedule you want to active. On one-line display telephones,
press #.
d Press OK to select the schedule.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


183
Using telephones for special features Section 3: Features

e Press QUIT to exit. (On one-line display telephones, press RLS).


Cancel feature: FEATURE #872.

• Routing service:
a Enter FEATURE 873.
b Enter the Service Control password.
c Use NEXT to scroll to the schedule you want to active. On one-line display telephones,
press #.
d Press OK to select the schedule.
e Press QUIT to exit. (On one-line display telephones, press RLS).
Cancel feature: FEATURE #873

Supervisor telephone for silent monitoring


The silent monitoring feature allows specified two-line display telephones to be used to monitor
Hunt group and Call Center operators. You can specify whether the system sounds a tone before
breaking into a call, or whether the break-in will be silent. Display prompts on the supervisor
telephone allows the supervisor to unmute or move from user to user.

Setting up Silent Monitoring

Where: Configuration//Telephony//Global Settings//Advanced Feature Settings

Monitoring mode:

SM sets:

SM password:

! Security Note: Change the password regularly.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


184
Section 3: Features Using telephones for special features

Assigning a supervisor telephone

A maximum of 30 two-line display telephones can be configured as supervisor telephones for


monitoring.

Where: DN record//capabilities

Using the feature: Refer to “Monitoring individual calls” on page 61.

Hospitality services telephones


This feature allows small to medium service facilities to provide customer telephone service, as
well as administration services through a telephone interface.

Programming: Besides the general line and telephone programming required for individual group
members, “Configuring Hospitality services” on page 55 explains the feature in detail.

Using the feature, refer to Hospitality user card (“Hospitality features”).

Setting up a central reception point


For incoming calls, you can have a central reception point, or you can specify target lines to one or
more telephones to receive directed calling.

If you are using the central reception point to answer all calls or to monitor incoming calls, you
may need the extended capabilities of an enhanced Central Answering Position (eCAP). These
telephones allow you to expand the number of line assignments, SWCA code assignments and
Hunt group indicators.

If you do not filter incoming calls through an attendant position, you can arrange your telephones
in Hunt groups, ringing groups, or call groups that use system wide call appearance (SWCA)
assignments to share calls.

You may want to set up a central reception point for a number of reasons:

• To filter all incoming calls through one point: set up the Auto Attendant feature.

• To provide fallback for unanswered telephones: Set up the prime telephone feature or use call
forward.

• To provide one number for callers that can be distributed to an internal group: Set up hunt
groups for service groups or System Wide Call Appearance (SWCA) assignments for small
groups.

• To provide a reception point for internal users: set up a direct dial code.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


185
Using telephones for special features Section 3: Features

Central Answering point overview

Setting up Auto Attendant

Auto Attendant runs from a separate client application. Refer to the CallPilot Auto Attendant
documentation for information about setting up this feature.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


186
Section 3: Features Using telephones for special features

Prime telephone
The prime telephone, which is defined for each line, receives unanswered calls when call forward
when the line cannot deposit the call at the intended telephone.

Programming

lines//prime telephone

Also refer to “Transfer (unanswered) calls” on page 169 and “Call forward (unanswered) calls” on
page 170.

Direct dial telephone


This is the telephone that system users can dial with one digit (direct dial access code). An
example of this would be a receptionist telephone. This telephone is also usually the control
telephone for system scheduling. You can create up to five direct dial telephones, however, they
all respond to the same direct dial access code.

Programming

access codes//Direct Dial number

numbering plan//direct dial set designations

DN record//capabilities//assigning to telephones

Extra direct dial set: // ring schedules

Creating an enhanced CAP station


Central answering position (CAP station): A CAP can consist of a 7316E digital phone plus one
to four eKIMs (key indicator modules) or one to nine OKIMs. When the CAP is assigned under
CAP/KIM assignment in the system it becomes an enhanced CAP (eCAP). The modules become
known as eKIMs. The system supports a maximum of 12 eCAPs.

eCAPs can:

• monitor system telephone status

• answer external calls on line buttons

• monitor Hunt group appearances

• support multiple appearances of a target line

• act as the prime telephone and direct-dial telephone for the system lines and telephones

N0027146 [Publish Date]


187
Using telephones for special features Section 3: Features

• send up to 30 messages to other system telephones.

• answer external calls on up to 112 lines on a KIM (120 lines on a legacy CAP), and extend
calls to other BCM50 telephones

• provide extra memory buttons for the 7316E digital phones

Telephones with KIMs that are not configured in system programming allow only memory button
programming on the modules. In this case, the KIM is known as an OKIM (ordinary KIM). There
is no specific limit for the number of CAPs using OKIMs for the system, except from a call
processing point of view.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


188
Section 3: Features Using telephones for special features

Legacy CAP: A 7324(N) plus one or two CAP(N)s (Central Answer Position modules)

Programming:

CAP/KIM

Programming KIM buttons

cold-starting a KIM

Hunt groups
This feature allows you to group your call center operators so you can target specific types of calls
to specific groups. As well, you can define how calls enter the group, so you can control the work
load based on your requirements for your operators.
Programming: Besides the general line and telephone programming required for individual group
members, “Hunt Group members and lines” on page 53 provides details about setting up hunt
groups and hunt group features.

The operation of some features varies if the BCM50 telephone is part of a Hunt group. Table 51
shows the affected features.

Table 1 Hunt group feature operation

Feature Description

Call Forward All Calls The system ignores Call Forward All Calls feature and the Hunt
group call rings at the telephone.

Call Forward No The system ignores Call Forward No Answer and the Hunt group
Answer call continues to ring until the hunt time expires.

Call Forward on Busy The system ignores Call Forward on Busy and the Hunt group call
continues to ring until the hunt time expires.

Do not Disturb on If this feature is active, the set will not receive notification of
Busy incoming Hunt group calls.

Group Pickup If a set is part of a Hunt group and a call pickup group, then an
incoming Hunt group call can be picked up from any set that is in
the call pickup group.

Transfer via Hold The system supports transfer for Hunt group sets. However, you
cannot Transfer via Hold. Once you answer a call on a Hunt group
set, its appearance disappears from all other sets in the Hunt
group. This means that other calls can come in on the same line.

Priority Call You cannot make Priority calls to Hunt group DNs.

Ring Again You cannot use Ring Again when calling a Hunt group DN.

Line Redirection The Allow redirect attribute should be set to N for lines assigned to
Hunt groups. For more information, see “Capabilities and
Preferences - Capabilities tab” on page 102.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


189
Using telephones for special features Section 3: Features

Table 1 Hunt group feature operation (Continued)

Feature Description

Page Zones You cannot include Hunt group DNs in a Page zone.

Voice Call Hunt groups cannot accept voice calls. Answer buttons have no
appearances for voice calls, and the set does not ring.

Ringing groups
If you set up call scheduling on the system, you can define groups of telephones into ring groups,
which allows you to specify schedules where Trunk Answer can be used within the ring group to
answer incoming calls, even on telephones which do not have that line specifically assigned. You
can also define a second direct dial set for a ringing group.

For details about setting up ringing groups, refer to “Creating ring groups” on page 43.

For using information about using schedules, refer to “Using the control telephone” on page 182.

Setting up Call Center

Call Center is run from a separate client. Refer to the Call Center documentation for information
about setting up this feature.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


190
Section 3: Features Using telephones for special features

N0027146 [Publish Date]


191

Section 3: Features

Display prompts and messages

Use this section to find the explanation for the prompts you see on your telephone. The following
tables show what the display reads, and then provides a description of the message, and/or the
required action. Prompts are listed alphabetically and in the following categories:

• “Common display prompts” on page 192

• “Viewing active services” on page 205

• “Call log prompts” on page 205

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


192
Section 3: Features Display prompts and messages

Common display prompts


These prompts can appear during general call features:

Display prompt Description of error or action


Key: NNN = DNs#; SSS = second DN#; XXX = line number; YYY = second line number

Double SS symbols indicate a long distance call. (May be available with Call
Display services.)
01:9___ Speed dial: Continue entering the number you want to program. You can
CANCL BKSP OK change the number by pressing BKSP or the volume bar. When you are
finished, press HOLD or OK.
3 parties only Conference call: You are trying to add a fourth party to your conference call,
or to join two conferences together.
Release one call from the conference before adding another, or keep the
two conferences separate.
NNN 02:47 Call duration timer: The display shows the last call you made, or the total
elapsed time in minutes and seconds on a current call.
XXX <LINENAME> Button inquiry: The display shows the number and name of the line. Press
SHOW OK SHOW to view the redirection status of the line.

NNN: Busy Hunt group: The hunt group member the hunt group member is in a
NEXT VIEW conference, and the supervisor cannot break in. The display briefly shows
Conference busy and then reverts to this prompt.
NNN: Idle Hunt group: The hunt group member currently is not handling a call.
NEXT VIEW

NNN <SETNAME> Button inquiry: The display shows the directory number of the telephone,
NEXT VIEW and the assigned name. Press NEXT to see the first line assigned to ring at
the intercom button.
NNNNNNNNNNNNN... Press # or press VIEW‚ or ·VIEW to view a number that is too long to fit on
VIEW‚ OK the display. Press OK when you have finished.

NNN>SSS Transfer: You are talking to the person you want to transfer the call to. Press
CANCL RETRY JOIN RETRY if you decide to transfer the call to another person. Press RLS or
JOIN to transfer the call.
NNN DND Camp-on: The person to whom you redirected a call has Do Not Disturb
CALLBCK active. The call has come back to you. Press the CALLBCK button or the line
button to reconnect to the call. On 7000 and 7100 digital phones, just pick up
the handset.
NNN no reply Transfer: The person to whom you tried to transfer a call did not answer.
CALLBCK Press CALLBCK or the flashing line button to reconnect to the call. On 7000
and 7100 digital phones, lift the handset to reconnect.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


193
Display prompts and messages Section 3: Features

Display prompt Description of error or action


Key: NNN = DNs#; SSS = second DN#; XXX = line number; YYY = second line number

NNN>SSS – You are receiving an internal call from extension NNN forwarded by
extension SSS
– You have an Answer button for extension SSS and an internal call from
NNN is ringing on SSS.
NNNNNNNN This prompt remains on your display while you are on a call you have dialed.
TRANSFR To transfer the call, press TRANSFR.

NNN You are connected to an internal call. Press TRANSFR to transfer the call.
TRANSFR

NNN busy The telephone you have called has no internal lines available.
PRIORITY LATER – Press LATER to use the Ring Again or Message features.
– Press PRIORITY to make a priority call.
Priority call: The telephone you want to transfer to is busy.
NNN calling You are receiving a call from extension 221.

NNN___ Continue entering digits. Press BKSP to delete incorrect digits.


QUITBKSPOK Press # or OK when you have finished.
auto dial: Continue to enter digits until the number is complete. Press the
volume bar or BKSP to erase an incorrect digit.
Press HOLD or OK when you finish.
Silent monitor: While a call is being monitored, you can choose to:
OTHERJOINEXIT – move to another Hunt group member (OTHER)
– join the current conversation (JOIN)
– exit the silent monitoring (EXIT)
Silent monitor: When you join a monitored call, you can choose to:
OTHERLEAVEEXIT – move to another Hunt group member (OTHER)
– mute your telephone out of the current conversation (this does not
disconnect silent monitoring) (JOIN)
– exit the silent monitoring (EXIT)
Access denied Programming is busy, or the feature you are trying to use is not compatible
with the configuration of the telephone or line.
Silent monitor: You tried to start a monitoring session on a telephone that
does not support the feature.
Already joined Your telephone is connected to the telephone you are trying to call. Check
your active line buttons, and return to that call.
Pickup group: You are connected to the telephone that made the call you
are trying to pick up. This display appears if you are on a call to a colleague,
your colleague dials the number of a telephone in your pickup group, and
you try to pick up that call.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


194
Section 3: Features Display prompts and messages

Display prompt Description of error or action


Key: NNN = DNs#; SSS = second DN#; XXX = line number; YYY = second line number

Already parked Call park: The person you were talking to has parked your call. You cannot
park the same call.
Autodial full Auto dial: The memory allocated to auto dial numbers in your system is full.

Button erased Auto dial: While programming external auto dial, you erased the button by
pressing HOLD or OK before entering any digits.
Call NNN? You have received a Ring Again offer from a call to an internal telephone.
YES NO Press the flashing internal line button or YES to call the number again. On
7000 and 7100 digital phones, just lift the handset. Otherwise, press NO or
wait 30 seconds for Ring Again to expire.
Calling NNN Wait for the telephone to be answered. If no one answers, press LATER to
PRIORITY LATER use the Ring Again feature or Message feature, or press PRIORITY to make
a priority call.
Priority Call: You initiated the Priority call transfer to this local.
Call blocked Priority call: You tried to place a priority call to another telephone in your
system. The person you called has blocked your call.
Camped: NNN The person at extension NNN has not answered the camped call. The call
CALLBCK has come back to you. Press the line button or CALLBCK to reconnect to the
call. On 7000 and 7100 digital phones, just pick up the handset to reconnect
to the call.
Camp denied Camp-on: You have tried to camp an internal call. You can camp external
calls only.
Camp to: Camp-on: Dial the number of the internal telephone to which you want to
CANCL camp the call.

Cancel denied Message: You entered an invalid number when trying to cancel a message.

Can't ring again You cannot use Ring Again on your current call. You can use Ring Again
while you have a busy signal on an internal call or line pool request or while
an internal call is ringing.
Cleared>LINENAM Message: You cleared an external message from your message waiting list.
NEXT The message exists in your message center until you erase it there.

CLI COPY INCOMP You attempted to allow CLI for an assigned line for more than 30
telephones.
Conference busy Conference: You tried to make a conference call, but your system is
handling the maximum number of conference calls (6).
Conf Resrce Full Silent Monitor: The six conference resources on the system are already
occupied. This is a transient display that reverts to HG Member DN: busy.
Denied in admin You are trying to use a feature, but do not have access to it under
administration.
Last Number redial: The Last Number is not allowed.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


195
Display prompts and messages Section 3: Features

Display prompt Description of error or action


Key: NNN = DNs#; SSS = second DN#; XXX = line number; YYY = second line number

Dial voice call Voice call: Dial the internal number or press the internal auto dial button of
the person you want to speak to.
DND from NNN Prime telephone: The person at telephone NNN has forwarded a call to you
using Do Not Disturb.
DND transfer Prime telephone: The system has transferred a call to you from a telephone
with Do Not Disturb turned on.
DN: Idle Silent monitor: The current call on the telephone you are monitoring is either
not a Hunt Group call, or the call came in on a line key on that telephone.
Note: You should not assign lines which are assigned to the hunt group to
individual hunt group members
DRT Line001 Prime telephone: No person answered this call so the system transferred it
to you.
Do not disturb The telephone you are calling has Do Not Disturb turned on. Press LATER to
PRIORITY LATER use the Ring Again or Messages features, or press PRIORITY to make a
priority call.
Priority Call: The telephone you want to transfer to has Do Not Disturb
active.
Do not disturb Transfer: The person to whom you tried to transfer a call has Do Not Disturb
CANCL RETRY JOIN active on their telephone.
– Press JOIN to transfer the call.
– Press RETRY to transfer the call to another person.
– Press CANCL or the flashing line button to reconnect to the call.
– On 7000 and 7100 digital phones use feature code
FEATURE #70 to cancel the call.
Enter code: Feature button: If you are checking a speed dial button, enter the two-digit
speed dial code that you want to check.
Enter digits Auto dial: Enter the number you want to program, selecting the line first, if
QUIT OK necessary, exactly as if you were making a call.
Speed dial: Enter the telephone number you want to program exactly as if
you were dialing it normally. When you are finished, press HOLD or OK.
Enter zone:___ Page: Enter the required page zone number (0- 6) or press ALL.
ALL

Exchanged Move button: The two buttons you selected have exchanged position.

Expensive route You have dialed a number, but the least expensive route programmed for
the system is busy. Unless you release the call, the number goes through on
a more expensive route.
F__ Feature button: Enter the feature code, or press RLS or QUIT to end
QUIT CLEAR programming or CLEAR to clear the numbers entered. The system accepts
the entry when you enter a valid feature code.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


196
Section 3: Features Display prompts and messages

Display prompt Description of error or action


Key: NNN = DNs#; SSS = second DN#; XXX = line number; YYY = second line number

Feature code: Feature button: Press FEATURE and enter the feature code you want to
QUIT assign to the button. Check that the code is valid.

Feature moved Feature button: You have programmed a button with a feature programmed
on another button. The feature has moved to the button you just
programmed. The original button is now blank.
<Feature name> Button inquiry: The name of the feature assigned to a button appears on the
SHOW OK display when you press the button. Press # or SHOW for additional
information.
Feature timeout You took more than 15 seconds to press a button in response to a display.

Forward>NNN Call forward: Your calls are being forwarded to telephone NNN.
CANCL

Forward denied Call forward: There are several reasons why you can get this message. For
example, you cannot forward your calls to a telephone that has Call Forward
programmed to your telephone.
Hidden number The last number you dialed or the number you saved for Saved Number
Redial was a speed dial number that displayed a name instead of the
number. You dialed the number correctly, but it is not visible.
Hold or release While on a call, you must either release the call or put the call on hold before
you can program a feature button.
SWCA: The requested SWCA code already has a call parked on it. Choose
another key position.
Inactive feature You entered the feature code for an application that is disabled.

Incoming only The line you are trying to use to redirect calls is for incoming calls only.
Select an outgoing line.
In observe: Silent monitor: The hunt group member is already being monitored.
Monitor

Intercom #: ___ Auto dial: Enter the internal telephone number you want to program.
QUIT

Intercom Line redirection: You selected the intercom button as the facility on which to
place the call. Enter a line pool code or a destination code.
In use:XXX You tried to program redirection while the feature is in use. Only one person
can program line redirection at a time.
SWCA: The requested SWCA code is being used by telephone XXX.
Choose another key position.
Message: You are trying to call from your message waiting list. The line that
you are trying to use is in use by the identified user in your system.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


197
Display prompts and messages Section 3: Features

Display prompt Description of error or action


Key: NNN = DNs#; SSS = second DN#; XXX = line number; YYY = second line number

Invalid code You entered an invalid feature code.


Speed dial: You have entered a code outside the code range (01-70 for
system, 71-94 for user-based speed dials).
Invalid location Move button: You tried to move a line to a button that cannot be a line
button, such as an intercom button, Handsfree/Mute button, or an answer
button.
Invalid number You entered an invalid line pool code or an invalid destination code.
Auto dial: You are programming an internal auto dial button and have
entered a number that is not an internal number on your system. Enter a
valid internal number. If the number you are entering is a destination code,
use external auto dial.
Call park: You have entered an invalid retrieval code.
Invalid number Transfer: You entered an invalid internal number. Press RETRY and enter
CANCL RETRY the number again. On 7000 or 7100 digital phones, use the FEATURE #70
feature code to cancel the call, and then retry.
Invalid number Silent monitor: The DN you entered is invalid for your system. Press
Observe Observe to enter another hunt group telephone.

Invalid zone Page: You have entered a page zone code that is not between 0 and 6.

LineXXX 01:45 Call duration timer: You parked your last call. You cannot see the length of
time a call was parked.
LineXXX>YYY You are receiving an external call forwarded from extension YYY, or you
have an answer button for extension YYY and an external call is ringing on
that telephone.
LineXXX>YYY Transfer: Press JOIN to transfer the call on line XXX to telephone YYY.
CANCLRETRYJOIN Press RETRY if, after talking to the person at extension YYY, you decide to
transfer the call to another person.
LineXXX NNN Conference call: You are on a conference with the two lines or telephones
TRANSFR shown. You can drop out of the conference and leave the other two parties
connected (Unsupervised Conference) by pressing TRANSFR or entering the
Transfer feature code.
LineXXX You are connected to an external call. Press TRANSFR to transfer the call.
TRANSFR Enter the digits of the number you want to dial.

LineXXX callback Prime telephone: A person camped, parked or transferred a call on line
CALLBCK XXX, but no one has answered the call. Press CALLBCK or the line button to
connect to the call.
Line XXX hung up Transfer: The external caller you were transferring hung up before the
transfer was complete.
Camp-on: A call you camped has come back to you, but the caller hung up
before you can reconnect.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


198
Section 3: Features Display prompts and messages

Display prompt Description of error or action


Key: NNN = DNs#; SSS = second DN#; XXX = line number; YYY = second line number

LXXX:LINENAMVMsg Message: You are viewing your message list. The display shows the
NEXT CALL CLEAR number and name of the line used for your message.

LineXXX>LineYYY Prime telephone: The call coming in on line XXX for target line YYY has
come to you because Line YYY is busy.
LineXXX to prime Prime telephone: There is no telephone that can receive a call on line XXX
so the system has transferred it to you.
LineXXX transfer Another user in the system is transferring a call to you on line XXX.

LineXXX waiting A camped call is waiting. Press the line button or use Call Queuing to
answer the call. Press HOLD if you have 7000 and 7100 digital phones.
Line denied You selected a line that is private to another telephone.
Trunk Answer: You have tried to pick up a call on a private line.
Line in use The line is in use. Make the call using normal methods or wait until a line is
free.
Line Redirection Line redirection: Press * or ADD to begin redirection. Press # or REMOVE to
QUIT ADD REMOVE cancel a previous redirection.

Messages & Calls Message: You have one or more messages and one or more new Call Logs.
MSG CALLS Press FEATURE 806 to change the first line of the display to the current
time and date.
Make calls first The feature you tried to use requires you to be on an active call at your
telephone. This prompt also appears when information about a call is
cleared by a system reset.
Message denied Message: You tried to send a message to an invalid internal number or to a
telephone that is out of service.
Message list Message: SHOW appears when you have remaining messages. Press SHOW
SHOW ADD EXIT to review messages you have sent. Press ADD to send a new message.

Message to: Message: Enter the internal number of the telephone to which you want to
send a message.
Microphone muted Voice call: Your handsfree microphone is on the mute setting. Press the
button labeled Handsfree/Mute or pick up your handset to respond to the
voice call.
Move line from: Move button: Press the button of the line you want to move. Press
QUIT FEATURE or QUIT when you have finished moving lines.

Move line to: Move button: Press the button you want to move the line to. Neither of the
QUIT buttons is erased. The lines, or the line and feature, switch places.

Need Handsfree Silent monitor: You entered the silent monitor feature code without picking
up the handset, and the telephone does not support Handsfree operation.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


199
Display prompts and messages Section 3: Features

Display prompt Description of error or action


Key: NNN = DNs#; SSS = second DN#; XXX = line number; YYY = second line number

No avail SWCA SWCA: The FEATURE *520 request was unsuccessful, either because the
telephone has no associated SWCA keys, or all the SWCA keys for that
telephone are associated with other calls.
Note: If the call is an internal call and the destination set has a SWCA
associated with the call, and if the originating set requests that the call gets
associated with a different SWCA, then the destination telephone transfers
the call to the new SWCA position. If the destination telephone does not
have a button programmed for the new SWCA position, the call disappears
from all SWCA button appearances and can only be retrieved by entering
the corresponding SWCA code.
No button free You tried to make, receive or pick up a call when no line button was
available. Some features require you to have a button free. Releasing calls
can free up line buttons.
Message: You have no line button free with which to reply to a message.
No call to park Call park: You have tried to use Call Park with no active call on your
telephone. If the call you want to park is on hold, reconnect to the call before
you park it.
No call on: 101 Call park: There was no call on the retrieval code (101-125) that you
entered.
No calls waiting You tried to use Call Queuing but no call was ringing at your telephone.
SWCA: The FEATURE *537 or FEATURE *538 request was used, but
there are no calls parked on any of the assigned buttons on your telephone.
No free lines All the lines or line pools available to the telephone are in use. This prompt
also appears when you try to dial an external number or use a feature that
conflicts with the lines, line pools or prime line used by the telephone. Your
installer must correct this situation.
No last number You have not dialed an external telephone number since the last power
interruption or system reset.
No line to use Line redirection: You have one external line on your telephone, but you need
a second line to perform line redirection. Redirect your external line using a
line pool as the outgoing line.
No line selected Auto dial or Speed dial: The telephone is set up to dial an external number
on a prime line but the telephone does not have a prime line. Your installer
must correct this situation.
No line selected There is no call ringing at your telephone. If you have a flashing line button
but your telephone is not ringing, press the line button to answer the call on
that line.
No number saved Saved number redial: You have tried to save the number of an incoming call.
You can only save numbers that you have dialed.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


200
Section 3: Features Display prompts and messages

Display prompt Description of error or action


Key: NNN = DNs#; SSS = second DN#; XXX = line number; YYY = second line number

No number stored Speed dial: There is no number stored on the speed dial code you have
dialed.
Message: There has been no number programmed for the message center.
Contact your voice messaging service provider.
No voice call Voice call: The telephone receiving the call cannot accept voice calls for one
of the following reasons:
– the telephone is active or ringing with another call
– Call Forward is on
– Do Not Disturb is on
– Voice Call Deny is on
– it is not a BCM50 telephone
– Your call continues as a normal ringing call.
Not available You tried to use a feature that is currently not available from your system.
Transfer: The telephone where you directed a call is not in service or is or
unavailable. The call returns to your telephone.
Not HG member Silent monitor: The DN you entered is not a Hunt Group member. Press
Observe Observe to enter another hunt group telephone.

Not in service Call forward: Two or more telephones are linked in a forwarding chain, and
one is out of service or used for programming.
Not in service Transfer: The telephone to which you are trying to transfer a call is out of
CANCL RETRY service.

Not in service Camp-on: The telephone to which you have camped a call is out of service
CALLBCK or is used for programming. The call has come back to you. Press CALLBCK
or the line button to reconnect to the call. On 7000 and 7100 digital phones,
just pick up the handset to reconnect with the call.
Not in Service Silent monitor: The DN you entered did not respond to the system. Press
Observe Observe to enter another hunt group telephone.

Not Supported Silent monitor: The DN you entered belongs to a portable telephone or an
Observe ISDN terminal. Press Observe to enter another hunt group telephone.

Observe: Silent monitor: The supervisor, hunt group member and the caller are all
RETRY connected.
OK If you make a mistake entering a DN number, press RETRY and re-enter the
number. If the number you entered is correct, press OK.
On another call The telephone you have called is on another call. Press LATER to use the
LATER Ring Again or Message features.

On another call Priority call: The telephone you want to transfer to is on another call.
PRIORITY LATER

N0027146 [Publish Date]


201
Display prompts and messages Section 3: Features

Display prompt Description of error or action


Key: NNN = DNs#; SSS = second DN#; XXX = line number; YYY = second line number

On hold: LINENAM You have placed one or more calls on hold. The name of the line held the
longest appears on the display.
Outgoing line Line redirection: You are trying to redirect a line and the line you have
selected is the outgoing line you have selected as a destination. You cannot
redirect a line to itself. Select another line.
Paging ALL Page: You are making a page. The display shows the page zone you have
selected. Press FEATURE or RLS when finished.
Paging busy Page: A page is being made in the page zone you have requested.

Page choice: Page: Select the type of page you want.


SETS SPKR BOTH

Page timeout Page: The time allocated for paging has expired.

Parked call No one answered the call you parked. The call returns to you.
CALLBACK

Park denied Call park: You have tried to park a conference call. Split the conference and
park the calls separately. The person who retrieves the calls can reconnect
the conference.
Parking full Call park: All available retrieval codes are in use. Transfer the call or take a
message instead.
SWCA: No park resources, out of the 27 that are available on the BCM50,
are free. Wait for one to become free, and then try again.
Parked on: n02 Call park: Record the code shown (n01-n25). Use Page (FEATURE 60) or
PAGE EXIT press PAGE to announce the call and its retrieval code.

Pickup: Pickup group: Enter the internal number of the telephone that is ringing. You
can use an internal auto dial button to do this.
If you decide not to answer a ringing call after you have activated Directed
Pickup, press FEATURE.
Pickup denied Pickup groupers is no call to pick up, or the call has been answered or you
have tried to pick up a call on a person’s private line.
Trunk Answer: The call that is ringing is on a line that is not in a Ringing
Service.
Pick up receiver You have used the Call Queuing feature without picking up the handset.
Auto Handsfree is not assigned to your telephone. You must use the
handset or press the handsfree button to answer a call.
Please wait Priority call: The party you are calling has eight seconds to decide to accept
or reject your priority call.
Pool code: ___ Line redirection: Enter a valid line pool access code.
QUIT

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


202
Section 3: Features Display prompts and messages

Display prompt Description of error or action


Key: NNN = DNs#; SSS = second DN#; XXX = line number; YYY = second line number

Press a button Auto dial: Press the memory button you want to program.
QUIT Button inquiry: Press the button you want to check. Press FEATURE or
EXIT when finished.
Press a line Move button: The button you are trying to move is not a line button. If you
are trying to switch a line and a feature, move the line to the feature button
and not the feature button to the line.
Press held line Conference call: You have activated the Conference feature with one call
active and another on hold. Press the held line to bring that person into the
conference.
Program and HOLD Auto dial: Enter the number you want to program on the button, then press
HOLD.
Speed dial: If you want to program a line or line pool selection for this speed
dial number, select the line or line pool. If not, enter the telephone number
exactly as if you were dialing it normally. When you are finished, press
HOLD.
Program and OK Enter the number you want to program on the button, then press HOLD or
QUIT OK OK. You can include a line or line pool selection in an auto dial sequence by
selecting the line before entering any digits.
Speed dial: If you want to program a line or line pool selection for this speed
dial number, select the line or line pool. If not, enter the telephone number
you want to program exactly as if you were dialing it normally. When you are
finished, press OK.
Programmed The number is correctly stored on the button.

Priority> NNN You are receiving a priority call. If you are on another call, tell the person you
BLOCK are speaking to that you are about to put the call on hold. Press the flashing
line indicator of the priority call or wait until the call connects automatically
(in eight seconds). The priority call goes through after you hear the next
beep. Your active call is on Exclusive Hold. It reconnects automatically when
the priority call ends (unless you transfer the priority call, in which case you
must press the line button of your original call to reconnect). Use DND
(FEATURE 85) or press BLOCK to reject a priority call.
Priority denied Priority call: The telephone you are calling is receiving a priority call at the
same time or cannot receive priority calls.
Redir by NNN Line redirection: You have tried to redirect a line, but another person has
OVERRIDE redirected that line. Press * or OVERRIDE to override the previous
redirection and redirect the line.
Redirect denied Line redirection: You can redirect calls only on individual lines.

Release a call You have no free line available to receive a call. Release one of your current
calls and try again to answer the incoming call.
Camp-on: The line that the camped call is on is in use or that line does not
appear at your telephone. Release the line or release an internal line.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


203
Display prompts and messages Section 3: Features

Display prompt Description of error or action


Key: NNN = DNs#; SSS = second DN#; XXX = line number; YYY = second line number

Release calls You tried to use a feature while you were on a call or had calls on hold.
Release the call or calls, before using the feature.
Silent monitor: You entered the silent monitor feature code on a telephone
that already has an active call. To continue, you will have to put that call on
hold, or release it.
Restricted call The destination you selected for line redirection is restricted.
System programming has a restriction configured for the call you are trying
to make, such as time-of-day restrictions for some calls.
Restricted call Transfer: You cannot transfer the call because of telephone or line
CANCL RETRY restrictions.

Ring Again? Press YES to use Ring Again. Press NO to send a message.
YES NO EXIT

Select a line Either you have no prime line, or the prime line is in use, or the line
programmed for an auto dial number, speed dial number, or Hotline is in
use. Select a line and dial again.
Speed dial: There is no line related with the speed dial number you are
trying to use. Select a free external line or line pool and enter the speed dial
feature code again.
Select line out Line redirection: Select the line used to redirect calls out of the system.
QUIT

Select line(s) Line redirection: Press the lines to redirect. To release a line selection, press
QUIT ALL the line to redirect again. Press ALL to redirect all your lines.
Cancel redirection: Press the lines that no longer need redirection. The lines
light up when pressed. After you cancel redirection for a line you cannot
restore it by pressing the line again. Press ALL to cancel redirection for all
your lines. When finished, press HOLD or OK.
Select line(s) Line redirection: Continue to press the lines to redirect. Press HOLD or OK
ALL OK when finished.
Cancel redirection: Continue to press the lines that no longer need
redirection. Press HOLD or OK when finished.
Send message? Press YES to send a message. See Messages.
YES NO

Set locked You cannot use the feature you selected because your telephone is locked.

Start of list Message: You are at the beginning of your list of messages. Press NEXT to
NEXT move through your messages.

Still in trnsfer Transfer: Complete the transfer in progress before you access a new
CANCL RETRY feature, answer another call or select an outgoing line.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


204
Section 3: Features Display prompts and messages

Display prompt Description of error or action


Key: NNN = DNs#; SSS = second DN#; XXX = line number; YYY = second line number

Supervisor Silent monitor: The DN you entered belongs to another Supervisor. You
Observe cannot monitor SM supervisor telephones. Press Observe to enter another
hunt group telephone.
Their list full Message: You are trying to send a message to a user whose message
waiting list is full.
Transfer denied Transfer: Your transfer does not function for one of these reasons:
CANCL RETRY – All the resources needed to perform a transfer are in use. Try again later.
– You have tried to transfer an external call to another external party. Some
restrictions apply.
– You cannot transfer your conference call.
Transfer to:2___ Transfer: Press RETRY if you entered the wrong internal number or if the
CANCL RETRY person to whom you are transferring the call is not available. On 7000 and
7100 digital phones, use the FEATURE #70 feature code to cancel the call,
and then retry.
Unequipped line Line redirection: The line you are trying to redirect cannot be redirected
because the hardware does not support redirection.
Unknown number Speed dial: The system cannot dial the number stored. Reprogram the
number.
Use line pool? You received a Ring Again offer for a line pool. Press the flashing internal
YES NO line button or YES to use the line pool. On 7000 and 7100 digital phones, lift
the handset. Otherwise, press NO or wait 30 seconds for the Ring Again offer
to expire.
Voice call Voice call: The line is open for you to speak.

Your list full Message: You tried to send a message but your list of sent messages is full.
Cancel one of the messages you sent, if possible, or wait until you have
received a reply to one of those messages.
Your number Silent monitor: You entered your own DN. Press Observe to enter another
Observe hunt group telephone.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


205
Display prompts and messages Section 3: Features

Viewing active services


These are the prompts you may get if you are viewing or changing your service scheduling.

Table 1 Active services:

Display prompt Description of error or action


<Sched> Restr'n You are viewing the active services. Press # or NEXT to view the other
EXIT NEXT active services. Press RLS or EXIT to quit.

<Sched> Restr'n The name of the current Restriction service schedule appears on the
QUIT OK NEXT display. Press # or NEXT to view the other Ringing service schedules.
Press HOLD or OK to select the required schedule.
<Sched> Ringing You are viewing the active services. Press # or NEXT to view the other
EXIT NEXT active services. Press RLS or EXIT to quit.

<Sched> Ringing The name of the current ringing service schedule appears on the display.
QUIT OK NEXT Press # or NEXT to view the other Ringing service schedules. Press
HOLD or OK to select the required schedule.
<Sched> Routing You are viewing the active services. Press # or NEXT to view the other
EXIT NEXT active services. Press RLS or EXIT to quit.

<Sched> Routing The name of the current Routing service schedule appears on the display.
QUIT OK NEXT Press # or NEXT to view the other Routing service schedules. Press
HOLD or OK to select the required schedule.
<Sched> until * Press HOLD or OK to select this schedule, # or NEXT to view the next
QUIT OK NEXT available schedule, or RLS or QUIT to exit. If you select this schedule, it
remains active until the next automatic schedule begins.
No services ON You have entered the Show services feature code and there is no active
service.
Services ON There is a service active in your system. Press * or LIST to view the active
LIST services.

Call log prompts


These are the prompts you may receive when you are viewing your call logs:

Table 2 Call log prompts:

Display prompt Description of error or action


1:Unknown name The caller's name is not available.

1:Unknown number The caller’s number is not available.

12:KATE SMITH The colon indicates a new item.


NEXT ERASE MORE

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


206
Section 3: Features Display prompts and messages

Table 2 Call log prompts: (Continued)

Display prompt Description of error or action


12 KATE SMITH The symbol indicates that the call was answered.
NEXT ERASE MORE

12 KATE SMITH The symbol indicates a long distance call.


NEXT ERASE MORE

49/1234567890123 / indicates the stored number was trimmed to its final 11 digits. Press the
NEXT ERASE MORE volume bar or MORE to show additional information about the call.

Call(s) bumped One or more log entries are deleted by the Autobumping feature while you
are viewing at the Call Log.
Hold or release Hold or release your active call before entering Call Log.

In use: SETNAME The external line is in use.

Jan 4 9:00a 3X The repeat call counter, shown with time and date, indicates the number of
NEXT ERASE MORE calls you have received from the same caller.

Line061 227 This call was answered at another telephone (227).


NEXT ERASE MORE

Line061 Logit This call was logged manually.


NEXT ERASE MORE

Line061 This call was not answered.


NEXT ERASE MORE

Messages & Calls There are one or more items in your message waiting list, and there are
MSG CALLS one or more new items in your Call Log. Press FEATURE 806 to change
the first line of the display to the current time and date.
New calls begin You have viewed your last old log item and now you can view your new log
items.
No info to log No information is available for the call.

No log assigned No log space has been assigned to the telephone.

No resume item The resume item has been removed because of Autobumping, repeat call
update, or log reallocation while you are looking at the Call Log.

Report and record alarm codes


An alarm telephone display shows BCM50 system alarm codes when they occur. The installer
assigns alarms to digital phones with two-line displays.
If an alarm message appears on the alarm telephone display it shows an Alarm number and a Time:
1 Record the alarm number and time.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


207
Display prompts and messages Section 3: Features

2 Call your customer service representative and report the alarm code.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


208
Section 3: Features Display prompts and messages

N0027146 [Publish Date]


209

Section 3: Features

Feature configuration: Making calls

This section describes the features the system user can configure or use to place outgoing calls.

For details about setting up routes and access codes, refer to ...keycode

This section includes:

• “Blocking user access to feature programming” on page 209

• “Protecting outgoing call privacy” on page 210

• “Deal with a busy signal on an internal call” on page 210

• “Other ways of communicating with internal users” on page 211

• “Dialing shortcuts” on page 217

Blocking user access to feature programming


You can block the user from using this feature key by setting the set lock for the telephone to
complete restriction. (Telephony//DN record//restrictions//Set lock)

1 Under Telephony//DN record, select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to
restrict trunk answer.
2 Click the Restrictions tab.
3 Click the Set restrictions tab in the bottom frame.
4 Beside the appropriate schedule, enter the filter that creates complete restriction.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


210
Section 3: Features Feature configuration: Making calls

Protecting outgoing call privacy


Outgoing calls contain name and number information that displays on the target telephone, if this
information is supported on the line, at the switch, and by the telephone.

You can block this information for outgoing calls using the ONN (outgoing name and number)
blocking code.

For details about setting up ONN blocking on the system and for telephones, refer to
“Programming outgoing CLID” in the BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide.

Activate feature: FEATURE 819

Cancel feature: FEATURE #819

Deal with a busy signal on an internal call


When the internal number you dialed is busy, here are some features you can choose to use:

• “Priority Call” on page 210

• “Ring Again” on page 211

• “Leaving a message” on page 211

Priority Call
If your call is urgent, use this code to override a busy signal or Do Not Disturb.

Note: Your telephone intrusion level must be equal or greater than the
telephone you are calling. (“Intrusion controls” on page 165).

Allowing a telephone to make priority calls

DN record//capabilities//priority call

Using the feature

1 Enter FEATURE 69
You are directly connected to the other person unless they press FEATURE 85 (Do Not
Disturb) to block the call.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


211
Feature configuration: Making calls Section 3: Features

Ring Again
Use this code to get the system to notify you when a telephone you want to call is no longer busy
or when a line pool becomes available.

There is no system programming to allow/disallow this feature.

Activate feature: While on the call, enter FEATURE 2.

Cancel feature: Enter FEATURE #2.

Blocking user access

You can block the user from using this feature key by setting the set lock for the telephone to
complete restriction. (Telephony//DN record//restrictions//Set lock)

Other ways of communicating with internal users


If you cannot reach a person, or if you want to reach more than one person, there are other methods
of communication, including:

• “Leaving a message” on page 211

• “Paging” on page 212

• “Making announcements to individuals (Voice Call)” on page 214

• “Create a conference call” on page 215

Leaving a message

The message feature is a standard system feature and has no specific programming. However,
some telephones and remote voice mail systems may require programming to ensure that message
waiting indicators (MWI) perform as expected.

This feature allows you to leave a message on the display of another telephone in your system or to
analog telephones connected to an Analog Station Module (ASM/ASM8+). The Messages feature
indicates if you have any messages waiting.

The Messages feature uses a message waiting list to keep a record of your internal messages and
your (external) voice mail messages. To keep a record of external voice mail messages, you must
have access to BCM50 Voice Messaging service with visual message waiting indication and a
BCM50 digital telephone.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


212
Section 3: Features Feature configuration: Making calls

User messaging codes:

• Send message FEATURE 1 (Cancel using FEATURE #1)

• View and reply to message FEATURE 65

• Cancel Message Waiting FEATURE #65

• Log into mailbox to leave message (FEATURE 980)

• Log into mailbox to play message (FEATURE 981)

• Erasing a message: While viewing a message, press Hold.

Note: For information about using any of the CallPilot or IVR


messaging for your system, refer to the documentation for the specific
application.

Note: Telephones with no display cannot receive messages.

Paging
If you are unable to reach a person by telephone, or you want to deliver the same message to more
than one person, use the page feature.

This feature allows you to make page announcements in various ways, depending on the audience
you are trying to reach.

Feature constraints:

• Telephones that do not have external speakers can initiate pages, but they cannot receive pages
(7000 and 7100 digital phones and the 2001 IP telephone). If you use zoning, put all of these
telephones in one zone and record it as a zone that cannot receive pages.
• Using Page with external equipment: When you make a page that uses external paging
equipment (external page or combined page), the Long Tones feature automatically activates
for the external paging system only. This allows you to control optional equipment with the
Long Tones feature.
• You can have a maximum of 50 digital telephones or a maximum of 60 IP telephones in a page
zone.
• Business Series Terminals note: If the active call is on mute when the page comes in, it will
not be returned to mute when the call comes off hold after the page.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


213
Feature configuration: Making calls Section 3: Features

Configuring system settings for page

Page is a standard system feature. However, there are two system settings that you need to confirm
or change, depending on your requirements.

Where: Configuration//Telephony//Global Settings//Feature Settings

1 On the Feature Settings panel, select the checkbox beside Page tone.
2 Select if you want a tone to sound before a page announcement (Y), or if you want the page
announcement to just occur. (Is this still and option?)
3 On the Timers panel, in the Page timeout dropdown box, select the amount of time before the
page automatically disconnects.

Configuring telephone settings for page

This section describes how to determine individual telephones access to the page feature, and how
the system handles page broadcasts.

Where: Configuration//Telephony//Sets//All DNs

1 On the DN records panel, click the Capabilities and Preferences tab.


2 Select the DN for the telephone where you want to define the page feature.
3 On the bottom frame, under the Capabilities tab:
• Select the Paging checkbox if you want the telephone to have access to the paging feature.
Programming note: This option must be selected for BST doorphone applications.
• Beside Page Zone, enter the zone you want the telephone to be part of for pages. Enter
None if you are not using zoning or enter 0 to address all zones.

Setting the page timeout

Page announcements are programmed to timeout after a pre-selected amount of time which is set
by your System Administrator under the Timers heading.

Element Manager: Configuration//Telephony//Global Settings//Feature Settings

Setting Auto hold on incoming pages

If the Page feature is enabled, telephones with active calls that receive internal pages will have the
active call put on hold for the duration of the page. When the page message is finished, the active
call will be removed from hold.

Configuration//Telephony//Global Settings//Sets//All DNs

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


214
Section 3: Features Feature configuration: Making calls

Business Series Terminals note: If the active call is on mute when the page comes in, it will not
be returned to mute when the call comes off hold.

Making a page announcement

Internal page: Make a page announcement to all, or to a specific group of telephones, through the
telephone speakers. Zone 0 pages all zones.

1 Enter FEATURE 61.


2 Press 0 to 6 to page a specific zone.

External page: Make a page announcement through an external loudspeaker system.

1 Enter FEATURE 62.

Internal and external page: Make a page announcement through both your telephone speakers
and an external loudspeaker system. Zone 0 pages all zones.

1 Enter FEATURE 63.


2 Press 0 to 6 to page a specific zone.

Making announcements to individuals (Voice Call)

Use the Voice Call feature if you want to make an announcement through a specific telephone
speaker.

Voice Call is a standard system feature and does not require any programming to activate or
deactivate the feature.

Feature constraints:
• Enable HF answerback if you want to respond to a voice call without picking up the handset.
• Telephones that do not have handsfree capability receive voice calls as ringing calls (7000 and
7100 digital phones, 2001 IP phones, and analog telephones).

Making a voice announcement

Make a voice announcement or begin a conversation through the speaker of another telephone
without first making the other telephone ring.

1 Enter FEATURE 66.


2 Speak through your handset, use handsfree or a headset.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


215
Feature configuration: Making calls Section 3: Features

Preventing voice announcements at a telephone

Prevent your telephone from receiving voice calls by using:

FEATURE 88 or FEATURE 85 (Do not Disturb)

Blocking user access

You can block the user from using this feature key by setting the set lock for the telephone to
partial or complete restriction. (Configuration//Telephony//Sets//All DNs//Restrictions tab)

Create a conference call


You can establish calls to two people at the same time, and allow each caller to hear the other two
callers. You must have at least two intercom buttons assigned to your telephone to initiate a
conference call.

The person who establishes the conference call, has several options available to provide control
within a conference call.

• remove callers temporarily (put on Hold), or permanently

• split the conference into two separate calls

• leave the conference, and allow the other two callers to remain connected

Setting a conference tone

If your profile allows it, you can configure the system to sound a tone when a conference call is
established.

System//Global//feature settings

Setting up a conference call

1 Make or answer the first call.


2 Put the first call on hold.
3 Make or answer the second call.
4 After the second call is connected, press FEATURE 3.
5 Press the line or intercom button of the first held call (not required on the 7100 digital phones).
6 Press RLS to end the conference call.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


216
Section 3: Features Feature configuration: Making calls

Other conference features:

• Remove yourself from the conference permanently: FEATURE 70.

Note: The other two callers remain connected. (Some external lines may
not support this feature. Ask your System Administrator.)

• Put the conference on hold at one telephone: Press HOLD.

Note: The other two callers can still talk to each other.

• Split a conference: Press the line or intercom button of one caller to consult privately while the
other caller is on hold.
Re-establish the conference: Press FEATURE 3

• Disconnect one party:


a Press the line or intercom button of the caller you want to disconnect, then press RLS.
b Press the line or intercom button of the remaining caller to resume your conversation.

• Independently hold two calls: Press the line or intercom button of the first caller, then press
HOLD. The second caller is automatically put on hold.
Re-establish the call: Press HOLD to retrieve one call from hold, press FEATURE 3, then
retrieve the second call from hold.

• Release privacy to create a conference call:


With a line programmed with privacy, you can turn privacy off to allow another person with
the same line to join in your conversation and form a conference. All the rules for a conference
apply but there is one line in use, instead of the normal two. This means that you cannot split a
conference set up using Privacy.
a Press FEATURE 83.
b Tell the other person to press the line button and join your conversation.

Note: Only two BCM50 telephones and the external caller can take part
in this kind of conference.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


217
Feature configuration: Making calls Section 3: Features

Send Hookswitch or DTMF during a conference call

Either system telephone engaged in a three-way conference call over a Network CLID or DS trunk
can issue a hookswitch or DTMF (????????) dialing request without leaving the conference.

Allowing the feature:

System//global//

• If you want the other set to hear DTMF tones during dial, ensure that the Long Tones feature is
active (FEATURE 808).

• If you want to conference in someone through the trunk, use the button marked Link
(FEATURE 71).

Note: This feature is not available for 20XX IP telephones, since they
cannot receive long or short tones.

Dialing shortcuts
Use the following features to save time when dialing:

• “Last Number Redial” on page 217

• “Saved Number Redial” on page 218

• “Autodial” on page 219

• “Speed dialing” on page 219

• “Programming memory buttons” on page 220

Last Number Redial


If the number you want to dial was the last number dialed from your telephone, use this feature to
redial the external number.

Allowing the feature

You allow last number redial for each telephone through the restriction programming.
DN records//restrictions//last number redial

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


218
Section 3: Features Feature configuration: Making calls

Using the feature

Press FEATURE 5.

Note: This feature records a maximum of 24 digits.

Saved Number Redial


Use this feature to save a number from an existing call or from an autodial button so that you can
call the number later. Each telephone can save only one number at a time.

Allowing the feature

You allow last number redial for each telephone through the restriction programming.
DN records//restrictions//saved number redial

Using the feature

1 While on the call, enter FEATURE 67.


2 When your telephone is idle, enter FEATURE 67.

Blocking user access

You can block the user from using this feature by setting the set lock for the telephone to partial or
complete restriction. (Telephony//DN record//restrictions//Set lock)

N0027146 [Publish Date]


219
Feature configuration: Making calls Section 3: Features

Autodial
You can program memory buttons for one-touch dialing of internal or external telephone numbers.
When you program an external autodial, you must specify a path out of the system. You can also
program autodial buttons with speed dial codes.

Programming DN records memory buttons for autodial:

DN record//Button programming//

For information about programming memory buttons on the telephone, refer to “Programming
memory buttons” on page 220.

Speed dialing
BCM50 provides two types of speed dialing:

• System Speed Dial programming allows you to assign two or three-digit speed dial codes to
the external numbers called most often. You can set the system to have 01 to 70 codes or 001
to 255 codes.

• User speed dial numbers can be programmed during telephone DN record configuration or at
the telephones by the users.

Programming System speed dials

System speed dials are programmed under System//speed dial where you specify the internal or
external dialed number, a name, and whether you want the system to ignore dialing restrictions.

System speed dials:

Provide a list of codes and numbers to your users.

Programming speed dials in the DN record:

1 DN record, select telephone.


2 Capabilities and preferences.
3 Click the Button Programming tab.
4 Select the button where you want to enter the speed dial code.
5 Enter FEATURE 0 and the system or user speed dial code.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


220
Section 3: Features Feature configuration: Making calls

Programming user speed dials at the telephone

1 Enter FEATURE *4.


2 Enter a two-digit code from 71 to 94.
3 Specify the external line by pressing a line button, a line pool button, or the intercom button.
(If you do not specify the external line, the system automatically chooses a line for the call.)
4 Dial the telephone number you want to program (up to 24 digits).
5 Press HOLD.
6 Record the code and number you programmed.

Blocking user access

You can block the user from using this feature by setting the set lock for the telephone to partial or
complete restriction. (Telephony//DN record//restrictions//Set lock)

Programming memory buttons


The telephones with programmable memory buttons are given a default set of button assignments
when the system is set up. The system administrator can change these defaults in system
programming. The user can also program memory buttons for autodial and feature codes, as well
as move button assignments around to best suit their working style.
If you want to remove a feature from a key, either replace it with another feature, or program it
with Blank.

The feature codes in this section allow you to program a memory key and to view what is currently
on a key.

Blocking user access

You can block the user from using this feature by setting the set lock for the telephone to partial or
complete restriction. (Telephony//DN record//restrictions//Set lock).

Viewing the feature that is currently assigned to a button

1 Press FEATURE *0 (button inquiry).


2 Press the memory key for which you want to view programming.
To check for your local number, press an intercom key.

Configure memory buttons at the telephone

1 Press FEATURE *3

N0027146 [Publish Date]


221
Feature configuration: Making calls Section 3: Features

2 Enter the feature code, auto dial, speed dial feature code and number, or SWCA code that you
want to program on your telephone.

Note: Using this feature overrides programming entered by the system


administrator. You cannot change buttons which have handsfree, lines,
intercom lines or Answer DNs assigned to them.

Erase a feature from a memory button

1 Press FEATURE *1
2 Press the memory key you want to erase.
3 Press OK.

Note: You cannot erase buttons assigned with lines, Answer DNs, or
intercom keys.

Store more than one number or code on one button

1 Press FEATURE *9 to insert a break point between numbers or codes.


You can program up to four numbers or codes separated by break points per memory key.
2 To use: The first press of the button dials the first number or code. Pressing the button a
second time dials the next number or code.

Adding external call codes to a memory button dial sequence

1 Enter FEATURE *3
2 Enter autodial or speed dial feature code.
3 Enter call feature in appropriate place in dialing string.

External call codes

Call code features can be part of dial strings for calls to external numbers. These codes allow
various actions to occur as part of the dialing sequence.

Note that you can use special alphabetical designators for the following features when you are
entering these features as part of a dial string within the Element Manager for:

• hotline external number

• call forward to external numbers

• system and user speed dial numbers

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


222
Section 3: Features Feature configuration: Making calls

• telephone and CAP button external number (auto dial)

• lines: Redirect to:

• routing dial string

• ONN block for Tone and BRI

• voice message center number

Table 1 External call codes and definitions

Link Generate a Link signal to access a PBX or other host exchange.


FEATURE 71 If you connect the system to a private branch exchange (PBX), you can use
LN a Link signal to access special features. On some telephones, Link is called
FLASH. You can include the Link signal as part of a longer stored sequence
on an external autodial button or in a speed dial code. The Link symbol uses
two of the 24 spaces in a dialing sequence. (FEATURE 71)
Note: This feature must be enabled under the restrictions for the telephone.

Pause Program within an external auto dial sequence to insert a 1.5-second delay.
FEATURE 78 This feature enters a 1.5-second delay in a dialing sequence on an external
P line. The use of this feature is often required for signaling remote devices,
such as answering machines, or when reaching through to PBX features or
host systems. You can program more than one pause in an external
autodial or speed dial sequence. (FEATURE 78)

Run/Stop Insert a break point into a sequence of dialed numbers or characters used
FEATURE *9 for automatic dialing. This can be necessary when you are connecting to a
PBX or similar host system. For example: you can call a company with an
B
automated attendant that instructs you to dial the internal number you need.
You can program the company number, a Run/Stop, then the internal
number on one external autodial button.
The Run/Stop symbol uses one of the 24 spaces in an autodial or speed dial
sequence.
You can include up to three Run/Stop commands in a dialing string. The
system ignores a fourth Run/Stop, and any digits or commands that follow
three Run/Stop commands in a programmed dialing sequence.
Programming: There is no system programming for this feature.

Wait for dial tone Program with an external auto dial number to cause the system to wait to
FEATURE 804 receive dial tone from another system before proceeding with the dialing
sequence.
DT
This feature (FEATURE 804) causes a sequence of numbers to pause until
dial tone is present on the line before continuing to dial. You can use this
feature if you must dial a remote system and then wait for dial tone from that
system before dialing the remainder of your number. The Wait for Dial Tone
symbol uses two of the 24 spaces in an autodial or speed dial sequence.
Programming: There is no system programming for this feature.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


Section 3: Features 223

Global IP features

These two global IP feature panels allow you to define a quick access feature menu and
customized display labels for 20XX IP telephone memory buttons.

Where:

Click on one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view:

Panels Tasks/Features
“IP features list” on page 415 “Assigning the list to a button” on page 417
“Using the Services button to access features” on page 417
“IP telephone feature display “Defining a key label” on page 419
labels” on page 418
Other IP global features: “Hot desking IP telephone configurations” on page 420
“Configuring a new time zone on a remote IP telephone” on
page 423
“Download firmware to a Nortel 20XX IP telephone” on page
424
Click on the navigation tree heading to access general information about Ring Group
management.

IP features list
You can add and modify the features that display on the IP telephone feature list, which is
accessed through the Services button or by using FEATURE *900.

Where: Element Manager, Telephony//Global Settings//IP Terminal Settings//Feature List

Table 1 describes the fields on the two records on this screen.

BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide


224 Global IP features Section 3: Features

Figure 1 Feature List tab fields

Table 1 Feature List tab fields description

Attribute Value Description

Seq # <read only> This is a list number, only.


Feature <alphanumeric> Label for the feature code.
Name
Feature Code <alphanumeric> The code for the feature.

Actions

Add 1. Click Add.


2. On the Add Feature dialog, find a feature code and enter a feature label.
3. Click OK to exit the dialog and save the new setting.
Delete 1. Select one or more feature lines.
2. Click Delete.
Note: This only deletes the feature from the list.
Up 1. Select a feature lines.
2. Click the Up button until the line moves up to the desired location.
Down 1. Select a feature lines.
2. Click the Down button until the line moves down to the desired location.

N0016866
Section 3: Features Global IP features 225

Assigning the list to a button

The services list defaults to the Services button . However, you can assign the display list
to one of the other feature buttons.

The user can also assign it as a memory button at a telephone, using FEATURE *3.

If you move the feature to another memory button, the Services button no longer accesses the
menu.

Using the Services button to access features

1 Press the Services button or whatever button where the list is assigned.
2 Use the up and down directional buttons on the telephone, or the Page + and Page - display
keys, to move through the list to find the feature you want.
3 Press the Select display key to activate the feature.
4 Use the feature as you would on any other telephone.
For example: if you selected Call Forward, enter the number you to which you want to forward
the call. Or, if you select speed dial (FEATURE 0), enter the speed dial code for the number
you want the telephone to dial.

IP telephone feature display labels


When your IP telephone acquires a DN record, the default settings are applied to the telephone,
including assigning features to the memory keys on the telephone. These features all have
pre-defined labels, and the telephone automatically displays the appropriate labels beside the
programmed buttons. This screen allows you to change the soft display label for features assigned
to the memory keys beside the displays for 20XX IP telephones.

This screen allows you to define custom labels for 24 features. The system comes with 10 default
labels, which are feature and language-specific, depending on the system assigned country/region
profile. The default labels are mainly messaging and call attendant features.

You can change any other feature label by adding to this list, or by deleting any of the default
settings and inserting new codes and labels.

Where: Element Manager, Telephony//Global Settings//IP Terminal Settings//Key Labels

BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide


226 Global IP features Section 3: Features

Figure 2 IP telephones Key Labels

Table 2 describes the headings on the table.

Table 2 Ringing group schedule line values

Attribute Value Description

No. This is the system number that identifies a label.


Feature Code <Feature code> Assignable feature code.
Key Label <text label> Each code has a default label. To change a label, click on the field and enter a
maximum of eight characters, including spaces.

Defining a key label


1 Select the feature you want to label:
If the feature you want to change is not already on the list, select a vacant feature field and
choose the feature from the dropdown list.
2 Beside the feature, select the corresponding Label field.
3 Enter a new label.

Some features, like Page and System Wide Call Appearances (SWCA), have several variations of
feature invocation that you may want to customize for the users.

N0016866
Section 3: Features Global IP features 227

Paging can be F60, F61x, F62, and F63x. System-wide Call Appearance (SWCA) has 16 codes
(*521 to *536). Table 25 shows examples of changing labels for page codes and SWCA codes:

Table 3 Relabelling examples

Feature code New label Feature code New label

60 Gen Page *521 SW Call 1


610 Pg Every *522 SW Call 2
61 Zone <digit from 1-9> *523 SW Call 3
62 Speak Pg *524 SW Call 4
630 Speak, All *525 SW Call 5

Note: Line names are defined when you configure the line, and can be
changed through the Lines menus.

Hot desking IP telephone configurations


You can transfer your IP telephony configuration temporarily from one IP telephone to another
using the Hot desking feature. This feature is described in detail in the Telephony Features
Handbook. You use FEATURE *999 to enter the feature. To perform hot desking, you are
prompted for a password, which is specified at the telephone, before you can complete the task.

Notes about Hot Desking


• The Hot Desking feature allows a user to divert calls and signals from one IP telephone to
another. For instance, if a user is temporarily working in another office, they can retain their
telephone number by hot desking their usual telephone to the IP telephone in their temporary
office.
• The hot desking code defaults to the first item on the services list.
• Once hot desking occurs between two IP telephones, no activity is allowed on the originating
telephone, except to cancel hot desking. The display on the originating telephone indicates
where it has been diverted.
• Call forwarding to voice mail continues as normal. Voice mail can be accessed from the
diverted IP telephone, as if it were the originating telephone.
• Using headsets with hot desking: If you use the headset feature on your IP telephone, and you
want to hot desk your telephone to another IP telephone, ensure that the target telephone also
has a headset installed before you enter the hot desking feature.
• If the target telephone does not have a headset, the headset feature from the first telephone
does not transfer during hot desking. Adding a headset to the target telephone after hot desking
is enabled does not correct the situation. To enable headset function in this situation, you need
to cancel hot desking, plug a headset into the target telephone, and then re-establish hot
desking.

BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide


228 Global IP features Section 3: Features

• If the target telephone has a headset, but the originating telephone does not, once hot desking
is activated the headset on the target telephone will no longer work. To correct this situation,
you need to cancel hot desking, plug a headset into the originating telephone, then re-establish
hot desking at the target telephone.

Head set feature active on target set after


Originating telephone Target telephone hot desking?

Yes

No

No

Using the hot desking feature

Using hot desking requires that you set up a password and permission on the originating telephone
and activate hot desking from a target telephone.

Setting up a password and allowing hot desking

Set up the password on the originating telephone. This process also allows you to determine if you
want the telephone to be able to be diverted.

1 Enter FEATURE *999.


2 Press ADMIN.
3 Enter a new password, or change an existing password, and press OK.

N0016866
Section 3: Features Global IP features 229

4 Confirm the password, and press OK.


5 Allow/disallow hot desking, as required by pressing CHANGE.
6 Press QUIT to exit.

Resetting the Hot Desking password

The Hot Desking password can be reset from system programming. This allows users who forget
their passwords to re-enter hot desking and to reset their password.

Note: This process also cancels hot desking for the telephone, if the
application is currently active.

Also refer to “Notes about Hot Desking” on page 420.

To reset the Hot Desking password field for a specific IP telephone:

1 You can access the reset button from two locations:


• Resources//Telephony Resources//IP telephony//Terminal Details tab
• Telephony//System DNs//IP Terminal Status tab
2 From the top list, select the IP telephone where you want to reset the password.
3 Click Reset Hot Desking Password.
4 Click OK on the dialog box to reset the password.
The password resets to Null. The user can enter hot desking again to enter a new password.

Using hot desking feature to divert an IP telephone configuration

You perform this procedure at the target telephone, where the diverted calls are to be answered.

1 Ensure both telephones are on-hook before attempting to activate this feature.
2 Enter FEATURE *999.
3 Press DIVERT.
4 Enter the DN of the telephone you want to divert to this telephone.

Note: If the originating telephone does not allow hot desking, a Not
allowed prompt displays. This prompt also occurs if the originating
telephone is on a call when the diversion command is issued.

5 Enter the password of the diverted telephone.

BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide


230 Global IP features Section 3: Features

The buttons on your telephone will mimic the buttons configured on the diverted set. The
diverted telephone indicates that it has been diverted, and it cannot be used until hot desking is
cancelled.

Cancelling hot desking

You can cancel hot desking from either telephone.

1 Ensure that both telephones are on-hook before cancelling hot desking.

Note: There may be up to a 10-second delay after the call ends before
the system will allow you to cancel hot desking. This period can vary,
depending on the call type.

2 Cancel the feature:


Diverted telephone: Press the display key under the CANCEL prompt.
Live telephone:
a Access FEATURE *999.
b Enter the password.
c Press CANCEL.

Configuring a new time zone on a remote IP telephone


If the IP telephone connects to the system from a different time zone than the system, you can reset
the telephone so that it displays the correct local time.

1 At the telephone, enter FEATURE *510.


2 Press CHANGE.
3 Press * to toggle between + and - (minus), depending on which side of the time zone the
telephone is located. As a rule of thumb, west is minus (-); east is plus (+).
4 Enter the number of hours difference.
5 Press OK.

N0016866
Section 3: Features Global IP features 231

Offset time zones: For areas, such as Newfoundland, Canada, where the time zone is offset from a
full hour, press the # key to add 0.5 to the number of hours, then press OK.

Note: The telephone is still configured to change when Daylight


Savings Time occurs if the host system is programmed to change.
Therefore, if the telephone is in an area that does not change time, for
example, Saskatchewan, Canada, you will need to readjust the time on
your IP telephone at each time change. You will also need to readjust the
time if the IP telephone is in a time zone that changes and the system is
not, for example, if the telephone is in Alberta, Canada and the system is
located in the business headquarters in Saskatchewan.

Download firmware to a Nortel 20XX IP telephone


Firmware is the software stored in the telephone. When the system is upgraded with a new IP
telephone firmware load, this firmware load automatically downloads into the IP telephones when
they next connect to the system.

The Terminal Details subscreen has a Force firmware download button that allows you to initiate
an immediate download to a telephone. You would do this in situations where you suspect that a
particular telephone has corrupted firmware. Refer to “IP telephone set details” in the BCM50
Networking Configuration Guide for details.

Follow these steps to force a firmware download to a telephone:

1 You can access the reset button from two locations:


• Resources//Telephony Resources//IP telephony//Terminal Details tab.
• Telephony//System DNs//IP Terminal Status tab
2 From the top list, select the IP telephone where you want to reset the password.
3 Click Force firmware download.
4 Click OK on the confirmation dialog.

The system drops any active call on that telephone and downloads a new firmware load into the
selected telephone(s). The telephones will be unusable until the download is complete and the
telephones have reset.

Note: In order not to saturate the IP network with download packets, the
system will only download up to five IP telephones at any given time.
Telephones requiring download will show an Element Manager status of
Download Pending, and the UNISTIM Terminal Proxy Server (UTPS)
will initiate download as resources become available.

BCM50 Networking Configuration Guide


232 Global IP features Section 3: Features

N0016866
233

Section 3: Features

Setting up auxiliary features

A music source or an auxiliary ringer can be connected to the system hardware. In programming,
you need to define how these features will be accessed and used.

Refer to:
• “Background music” on page 234
• “Auxiliary ringer” on page 234
• “BST Doorphone” on page 234

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


234
Section 3: Features Setting up auxiliary features

Background music
If there is an external music source connected to your system or if you have the IP music feature
set up to use internet-based music distributors or download music clips onto your system, you can
listen to music through the speaker on the telephone (FEATURE 86), or you can allow the music
to be heard by callers who have been put on hold.

Setting on-hold programming for lines:

lines//general settings//on hold (none, tones, music)

Setting background music for the system

system//global settings//Background music and on hold (“Capabilities and Preferences -


Capabilities tab” on page 102)

Refer to the hardware installation sections for information about installing an external music
source.

Auxiliary ringer
This optional device can be connected through a RJXX connection to your system. The auxiliary
ringer is best suited to factory type locations that require loud ringing bells or horns.

Enabling/disabling the feature for:

• a line: lines//external ringer (“Properties”)

• a telephone: DN record/Capabilities//aux. ringer (“Capabilities and Preferences - Capabilities


tab” on page 102)

• ring groups: Ring groups//Line settings//aux ringer (“Ring Groups - Line Settings” on
page 45)

• hunt groups: hunt groups// (“Hunt Groups system setup” on page 50)

BST Doorphone
This is a device that installs at security entrances. This device uses a DN record in the system DNs
range. The DN record for a doorphone will display 7324. However, there are specific required
settings for the doorphone. Also, the doorphone does not use the user preferences or the Telco
features settings. Installation and configuration information is contained in the BST Doorphone
Installation and Configuration Guide

N0027146 [Publish Date]


235

Section 3: Features

Relocating telephones

This section explains what happens when you physically move telephones within the system,
depending on whether you want the programming to follow the telephone to the new location.

• “Moving digital telephones” on page 236

• “Moving IP telephones” on page 237

• “User card list” on page 238 provides a list of the user cards that provide information about
using individual types of telephones and the features they can access.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


236
Section 3: Features Relocating telephones

Moving digital telephones


You can move a telephone to a new location within the system without losing its programmed
settings. Set relocation (automatic telephone relocation) must be enabled in system programming.
This makes the internal numbers, autodial settings, and personal speed dial codes remain with the
telephone when it is unplugged.

Note: The set relocation feature applies to the digital telephones and analog telephones,
only. IP telephones always retain their programming. Refer to “Moving IP telephones” on
page 237.

Tips (if set relocation is enabled)


Relocate existing telephones before new telephones are installed on the jacks. This allows
the moved telephones to retain their programming.
Plugging a new telephone into a jack from which another telephone was removed, before
the original telephone is reconnected to another jack, will result in the programming
transferring to the new telephone. In this case, when the original telephone is plugged into
another jack, it will receive default programming or the programming specifically entered
for the DN record that corresponds to the new jack.
When changing a telephone internal number (DN record), wait one minute automatic
telephone relocation. When you relocate a telephone, the telephone must remain installed
and connected in the new location for at least three minutes for the programming
relocation to be complete. Moving the telephone again before the three-minute period may
result in losing the programming.

To enable set relocation, and relocate digital telephones:


1 In the Element Manager, click the keys beside Services, Telephony Services,
General settings.
2 Click the Feature settings heading.
3 In the Set relocation box, click Y.
4 Move the telephone: Unplug the telephone and plug it in again at another location. It may
take up to 45 seconds for the system to recognize the telephone.
5 Disable set relocation (set to N) when you have completed all the moves you want to make.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


237
Relocating telephones Section 3: Features

Moving IP telephones
IP telephones retain their DN when they are moved to a new location on the same subnet. The
following instructions apply to Nortel IP telephones.

Moving IP telephones and retaining the DN


To move an IP telephone without changing the DN:

1 If you want to retain DN-specific features such as Call Forward No answer and Call Forward
on Busy if an IP telephone becomes disconnected, you must activate the Keep DN alive
setting, as described below. Otherwise, go to step 2.
a In the Element Manager, under the Services, Telephony Services list, click the DN record
for the IP telephone.
b Click the Capabilities heading.
c Beside the Keep DN alive field, choose Y.
Choosing N for this field allows the DN record to become inactive if the IP telephone is
disconnected. This produces a Not in Service prompt if any of the special features,
such as Call Forward, are invoked.

Warning: If the system is reset while an IP telephone is disconnected,


the Keep DN alive feature becomes inactive until the telephone is
reconnected. This setting must be enabled if you want to change the
codec or jitter buffer for an IP telephone that is offline.

Note: When an IP telephone is disconnected, there is about a 40-second


delay before the system activates Keep DN alive during which incoming
calls will either get a busy signal or be rerouted to the Prime set,
depending on how your system is programmed. The same type of delay
occurs when the IP telephone is reconnected to the system.

2 Disconnect the power from the IP telephone or 3-port switch.


3 Disconnect the network connection.
4 At the new location, reconnect the network cable and the power connection.
5 If the new location is on a different subnet, you will need to make the appropriate changes to
the telephone IP addressing. However, do not change the S1 IP address or the S2 IP address.

Note: If your network is using partial DHCP, reconfiguration is not


required at this step.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


238
Section 3: Features Relocating telephones

Moving telephones and changing the DN


To move a Nortel IP telephone and change the DN:
1 Deregister the DN.
2 Disconnect the network connection and the power connection from the telephone.
3 Reinstall the phone at the new location and reconfigure the telephone.

User card list


Following is a list of feature and device user guides that can be found on your system CD:

• T7000 Telephone User Card

• T7100 Telephone User Card

• T7208 Telephone User Card

• T7316E Telephone User Card

• Central Answering Position (CAP) User Guide

• T7406 Cordless Telephone User Card

• i2004 Internet Telephone User Card

• i2002 Internet Telephone User Card

• i2001 Internet Telephone User Card

• i2050 Software Phone has on-line user help

• Analog Telephone User Guide

• Telephone Feature User Guide

• Hospitality Features Card

• System Wide Call Appearance (SWCA) Features Card

N0027146 [Publish Date]


239

Section 3: Features

Defining region-based defaults

This section describes some of the differences in the system defaults. These defaults are set based
on the region or telephony or CallPilot template that you select in the Quick Start wizard when the
system is first configured. Each region is designed using a set of system defaults that provide
specific functionality for the geographical area in which the system is deployed.

This section includes information about:

• “Region-based system settings”

• “BRI and PRI line types” on page 251

• “CallPilot regions” on page 253

Region-based system settings


The tables in this section provide information about different settings that affected by the region
assigned to the system.

• “Core software and regions” on page 240

• “Languages” on page 240

• “Caller ID displays” on page 242

• “Companding Law by region” on page 242

• “Media bay module availability by region” on page 243

• “FEM(no longer supported)-trunk module combinations by region” on page 244

• “PRI line protocol support, by region” on page 245

• “Supported ISDN line services” on page 246

• “Defining time zones by country and language” on page 247

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


240
Section 3: Features Defining region-based defaults

• “System feature defaults” on page 247

• “Dialing plan defaults” on page 250

Core software and regions


Each Region setting requires a specific core software to perform correctly.

Table 55 shows the core software available.

Table 1 Core software, defined by region and carrier profile

Core Software T1 CT2 Plus T1 Etiquette E1 Euro E1 Global E1 CALA


(Carrier s/w
ID)
Region Caribbean Caribbean Denmark Australia Australia
Hong Kong Hong Kong France Brazil Brazil
North North Germany CALA CALA
American American Holland Global Global
Taiwan Taiwan Italy PRC PRC
Norway
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
United Kingdom
South American and Central American countries are assigned to regions in the following way:
• Caribbean includes Antigua, Bahamas, Barbados, Bermuda, Cayman Islands, Dominican Republic,
Jamaica, USVI, Puerto Rico, and Trinidad
• CALA refers to all other Caribbean and Latin American countries with European-based standards.

Languages
Table 56 lists the languages available for each region and a specific order in which the languages
are set as default.

Table 2 Languages
Region Language
CALA
Caribbean
Hong Kong
NA English, NA French, NA Spanish
North American
PRC
Taiwan
Australia
UK English
United Kingdom
Brazil Portuguese, NA English
Denmark Danish, Norwegian, Swedish, NA English
France Euro French, NA English

N0027146 [Publish Date]


241
Defining region-based defaults Section 3: Features

Table 2 Languages (Continued)


Region Language
Germany German, NA English
Global NA English, NA French, NA Spanish, Turkish
Holland Dutch, Euro French, NA English
Italy Italian, NA English
Norway Norwegian, Swedish, Danish, NA English
Spain Euro Spanish, NA English, Portuguese
Sweden Swedish, Norwegian, Danish, NA English
Switzerland German, Euro French, Italian, NA English

Table 57 shows a breakdown of the language support for South American and Central American
countries.

Table 3 South/Central America language breakout

Language Spanish English French Portuguese


Country Dominican Peru St. Thomas Guyana Haiti Brazil
Republic Panama USVI Montserrat
Jamaica Uruguay Aruba St. Kitts
Puerto Rico Venezuela Bahamas St. Lucia
Argentina El Salvador Bermuda St. Maarten
Bolivia Honduras Curacao Suriname
Chile Ecuador Trinidad Turks &
Columbia Paraguay Anguilla Caicos
Costa Rica Antigua St. Vincent
Guatemala Barbados St. Thomas
Mexico Dominica Cayman
Nicaragua Grenada Islands
Belize

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


242
Section 3: Features Defining region-based defaults

Caller ID displays
The North American region supports the following format: 5554775 (613)

All other regions display the numbers in a continuous string of a maximum of 14 characters:
6135554775

Companding Law by region


Table 58 shows the companding law used for each region.

Table 4 Companding law

Companding Law
mu-law A-law
Caribbean Australia Italy
Hong Kong Brazil Norway
North American CALA PRC
Taiwan Denmark Spain
France Sweden
Germany Switzerland
Global United Kingdom
Holland

N0027146 [Publish Date]


243
Defining region-based defaults Section 3: Features

Media bay module availability by region


Some of the media bay modules are customized for a specific type of line and are not available to
all regions. Table 59 lists a cross-reference between regions and the type of modules that can be
used within the related area.

Table 5 Module availability, by profile

Region DSM ASM+ ASM CTM 4X16 GATM BRI DTM


Australia 9 9 9 9
Brazil 9 9 9 9
Caribbean 9 9 9 9 9
CALA 9 9 9 9 9
Denmark 9 9 9
France 9 9 9
Germany 9 9 9
Global 9 9 9 9 9
Holland 9 9 9
Hong Kong 9 9 9 9 9
Italy 9 9 9
North American 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
Norway 9 9 9
PRC 9 9 9 9 9
Spain 9 9 9
Sweden 9 9 9
Switzerland 9 9 9
Taiwan 9 9 9 9 9 9
United Kingdom 9 9 9 9 9

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


244
Section 3: Features Defining region-based defaults

FEM(no longer supported)-trunk module combinations by region


Trunk Modules may be connected to the BCM50 system using the Fiber Expansion Module
(FEM). Table 60 provides a cross-reference between regions and the Trunk Modules you can
connect to the FEM.

Table 6 Trunk availability, by region

Region BRI S/T 2/4 BRI U2/4 Analog DID Analog E&M Analog Country- specific
CLID analog trunk
card
Australia 9 9
Brazil 9
CALA 9 9 9 9 9
Caribbean 9 9 9 9 9
Denmark 9
France 9 9
Germany 9 9
Global 9 9 9
Holland 9 9
Hong Kong 9 9 9 9
Italy 9
North American 9 9 9 9 9
Norway 9
PRC 9 9 9
Spain 9
Sweden 9
Switzerland 9
Taiwan 9 9 9 9
United Kingdom 9 9

N0027146 [Publish Date]


245
Defining region-based defaults Section 3: Features

PRI line protocol support, by region


Table 7 PRI line protocol supported, by region

Region BRI T side BRI S side PRI T1


Australia ISDN ETSI 300 ISDN ETSI 300 DASS2
403 102 DPNSS
MCDN
ISDN ETSI 300 403,
ETSI QSIG 300 239,
Brazil ISDN ETSI 300 ISDN ETSI 300 ETSI QSIG 300 239,
CALA 403, ETSI QSIG 102 ISDN ETSI 300 403,
300 239 MCDN
Caribbean NI-2 NI-2 NI-2 Loop
North American 4ESS E&M
DMS100 DID
DMS250 Ground
MCDN Fixed trunk types
Hong Kong ITU-T ITU-T ITU-T Loop
Taiwan E&M
DID
Ground
Fixed trunk types
Denmark ETSI QSIG 300 ISDN ETSI 300 DASS2
France 239, ISDN ETSI 102 DPNSS
300 403
Germany MCDN
Global ETSI QSIG 300 239
Holland ISDN ETSI 300 403
Norway
PRC
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Italy ISDN ETSI 300 ISDN ETSI 300 DASS2
102 ETSI QSIG 102 DPNSS
300 239
MCDN
ETSI QSIG 300 239
ISDN ETSI 300 102
United Kingdom ETSI QSIG 300 ISDN ETSI 300 DASS2
239, ISDN ETSI 102 DPNSS
300 403
MCDN
ETSI QSIG 300 239
ISDN ETSI 300 403

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


246
Section 3: Features Defining region-based defaults

Supported ISDN line services


Table 62 shows the ISDN private network services that are supported by the BCM50.

Table 8 ISDN line services

MCDN over PRI (SL-1) DPNSS DASS2 ETSI QSIG


Basic Call Basic Call Basic Call Basic Call
DDI DDI DDI DDI
Name display Diversion Originating line identity (OLI) Name display
Number display Redirection Terminating Line Identity (TLI) Number display
Centralized voice mail Centralized voice Call Charge Indication (CCI)
mail
Camp-on Call Offer Call Charge Rate Indication
(CCRD)
ISDN Call Connection Limit Loop avoidance
Network Call Transfer Executive Intrusion
Break-in Three Party
Trunk Route Optimization Route Optimization
(TRO)
Trunk Anti-Tromboning

Table 63 shows the network-based ISDN supplementary services and the features available for
each.

Table 9 ISDN services, by Protocol

Protocol Available ISDN services


NI Basic Call
(Caribbean. North America) DID
Name display
Number display
ONN blocking
ETSI Euro Basic Call
(Australia. CALA, Denmark, DDI
France, Germany, Global, subaddressing (on S-loop)
Holland, Hong Kong, Italy, ETSI Call Diversion (partial rerouting)
Norway, PRC, Spain, Sweden,
Switzerland, Taiwan, United AOC-E (specific changes for Holland and Italy)
Kingdom) MCID
CLIP
COLP
CLIR

N0027146 [Publish Date]


247
Defining region-based defaults Section 3: Features

Defining time zones by country and language


Time zones are based on the actual time zone where the BCM50 base unit is located. The Time
Zone dropdown list on the initialization screen, allows you to be very specific in choosing a
compatible time zone. If your exact location is not on the list, choose the one with the time zone
closest to you. Note that some time zones are individualized because they do not switch from
Standard Time to Daylight Saving Time. For example, this is the case for Saskatchewan.

The format of the time and date changes are based on the prime language of the region. Table 64
provides a list of formats based on language or country.

Table 10 Time/date formats based on language

Language/
Time/Date format Language/Country Time/Date format
Country
Danish 2001-01-01 13:57 NA English Jan 1 1:57 pm
Dutch 1 Jan 01 13:57 NA French 2001-01-01 13:57
EuroFrench 1 jan 13:57 NA Spanish Ene 1 1:57 pm
EuroSpanish 1 Ene 13:57 Norwegian 1 Jan 13:57
Brazil
Swedish 2001-01-01 13:57
German 1 Jan 13:57 Turkish 1 Ock 13:57
Italian 1 Gen 13:57 UK English 1 Jan 1:57 pm

System feature defaults


Table 65 compares the system defaults for the North American, Global and UK regions. In
addition, the following functionality applies:

• Regions for Denmark, Holland and Sweden are the same as the Global region except for the
default to local languages and local tones and cadences.

• The Region for the Caribbean is the same as the North American region except that it supports
the M7000 telephone.

• The Region for CALA is the same as the Caribbean region, except NI ISDN is replaced by
ETSI ISDN (u-law).

• The Region for Europe is the same as the United Kingdom region except there are no default
dialing restrictions, and ATA2 parameters are set to European values.
Table 11 Region defaults

Functionality Attribute North American Global United Kingdom


Direct Dial Access 0 0 0
code
DTMF parameters Tone duration 120 msec 120 msec 120 msec

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


248
Section 3: Features Defining region-based defaults

Table 11 Region defaults (Continued)

Functionality Attribute North American Global United Kingdom


Pause time 1.5 1.5 3.5
Interdigit time 80 msec 80 msec 100 msec
Conference tone disabled disabled enabled
Call Back Kill time 180 sec 180 sec 360 sec
PCM Companding mu-law a-law EBI a-law EBI
Law
Race Integration disabled disabled disabled
OLI digits fixed 10 digits fixed 10 digits variable length a
maximum of 8
Dial Tone Detection enabled enabled enabled
Hunt Groups Show in second disabled disabled disabled
Default delay 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles
Queue timeout 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec
If busy busy tone busy tone busy tone
Mode broadcast broadcast sequential
Target line if busy prime prime busy tone
setting
M7000 set disabled enabled enabled
Fax switch enabled enabled enabled
Service Schedule Night start 23:00 start 23:00 start 23:00
time end 07:00 end 07:00 end 07:00
Evening start 17:00 start 17:00 start 17:00
end 23:00 end 23:00 end 23:00
Lunch start 12:00 start 12:00 start 12:00
end 13:00 end 13:00 end 13:00
Service 4 start 00:00 start 00:00 start 00:00
end 00:00 end 00:00 end 00:00
Service 5 start 00:00 start 00:00 start 00:00
end 00:00 end 00:00 end 00:00
Service 6 start 00:00 start 00:00 start 00:00
end 00:00 end 00:00 end 00:00
Call Forward Delay Show in second disabled disabled disabled
Default 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 2 ring cycles
Options • 2 ring cycles • 2 ring cycles • 2 ring cycles
• 3 ring cycles • 3 ring cycles • 3 ring cycles
• 4 ring cycles • 4 ring cycles • 4 ring cycles
• 6 ring cycles • 6 ring cycles • 6 ring cycles
• 10 ring cycles • 10 ring cycles • 10 ring cycles

N0027146 [Publish Date]


249
Defining region-based defaults Section 3: Features

Table 11 Region defaults (Continued)

Functionality Attribute North American Global United Kingdom


DRT Delay Show in second disabled disabled disabled
Default 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles
Options • 1 ring cycle • 1 ring cycle • 1 ring cycle
• 2 ring cycles • 2 ring cycles • 2 ring cycles
• 3 ring cycles • 3 ring cycles • 3 ring cycles
• 4 ring cycles • 4 ring cycles • 4 ring cycles
• 6 ring cycles • 6 ring cycles • 6 ring cycles
• 10 ring cycles • 10 ring cycles
Handsfree none none none
Pickup Group none none none
Remind Delay 60 secs 60 secs 60 secs
Allow SLR disabled disabled disabled
Transfer Callback Show in second disabled disabled disabled
Default 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles
Options • 3 ring cycles • 3 ring cycles • 3 ring cycles
• 4 ring cycles • 4 ring cycles • 4 ring cycles
• 5 ring cycles • 5 ring cycles • 5 ring cycles
• 6 ring cycles • 6 ring cycles • 6 ring cycles
• 12 ring cycles • 12 ring cycles • 12 ring cycles
Dialling Plan market market dependent market dependent
dependent (defined in (defined in application
(defined in application but but controlled by
application but controlled by market profile ID)
controlled by market profile ID)
market profile ID)
ONN Blocking VSC for analog n/a n/a 141
tone
VSC for analog n/a n/a 141
pulse
VSC for BRI n/a n/a 141
VSC for PRI n/a n/a 141
State for BRI/ n/a n/a send feature code
PRI
Default CO lines 2 2 4
UTAM enabled disabled disabled
Portable credits 0 defined in the n/a
application (max)
Release reason Release text none none detail
Release code disabled disabled disabled
Display duration 3 sec 3 sec 3 sec
Overlap Receiving disabled enabled disabled

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


250
Section 3: Features Defining region-based defaults

Table 11 Region defaults (Continued)

Functionality Attribute North American Global United Kingdom


Local Number length 8 8 8
for ISDN overlap
receiving
Tandem alerting disabled disabled disabled
TON/NPI national/E.164 national/E.164 unknown/unknown
National number 10 10 0
length
national number n/a n/a 0
prepend
Provide tone on PRI enabled n/a disabled

Dialing plan defaults


Some profiles have default restriction dialing filters. Table 66 lists the filters for these profiles.

Table 12 Default dialing restrictions, by profile

Restriction Restriction Restriction/ Restriction Restriction Restriction Restriction


Profile
filter # /override override /override /override /override /override
UK 1 0/0600 1 010
5 010 1 00
6 *
North 1 0 1/1800, 911/911 9411 976 1976
America 1877, 1888
1***976 1900 1***900 5551212
Hong 1 00*** 170 172 173 1747 1760
Kong
1761 1766 1770 1771 1772 1775
1778 1783 1788 900
Australia 1 0/013 1/13, 1800
5 00 1/13, 11,
1800
6 *

N0027146 [Publish Date]


251
Defining region-based defaults Section 3: Features

BRI and PRI line types


Table 67 provides a description of the types of lines that BRI and PRI trunks can provide. These
are set under Resources, Media Bay Modules, Bus XX, Module X on the Element Manager.

Note that some of these line types are only available when specific regions are chosen.

Table 13 BRI and PRI line types (DTM and BRI modules)

Digital trunk types Description


T1 digital line that carries data on 24 channels at 1.544 Mbps (North American);
30 channels at 2,048 Mbps (Europe)
Loop, E&M, DID and ground start trunks are also versions of T1 lines.
You can program auto-answer T1 loop start, T1 E&M trunks, T1 DID, T1 ground
start trunks, PRI and IP trunks to map to target lines to provide for attendant
bypass (calling directly to a department or individual) and line concentration (one
trunk can map onto several target lines).
DID This is a type of T1 trunk line that allows an outside caller to dial directly into a line
on the BCM50.
Loop This is a type of T1 line. This type of line is used on systems where the service
provider supports disconnect supervision for the digital loop start trunks.
These trunks provide remote access to the BCM50 from the public network. This
trunk must have disconnect supervision to allow the trunk to be set to
auto-answer, which provides the remote access portal.
Ground T1-groundstart trunk
These lines offer the same features as loop start trunks, but are used when the
local service provider does not support disconnect supervision for digital loop start
trunks. Ground start trunks work with T1 only. By configuring lines as ground start,
the system will be able to recognize when a call is released at the far end.
E&M T1 and E&M. This type of trunk line is used to create simple network connections
to other phone systems.
This trunk always operates in a disconnected supervised mode.
PRI ISDN interface with 23 B channels and 1 D channel at 1.544 MBps (in Europe:
30 B channels and 2 D channels at 2.048 Mbps).
This is the module that controls system timing.
These lines give you incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network and are
auto-answer trunks, by default.
These lines provide a fast, accurate and reliable means of sending and receiving
data, images, text and voice information. using PRI lines allows for faster
transmission speeds and the addition of a variety of powerful business
applications, including remote LAN access, video conferencing, file transfer and
internet access.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


252
Section 3: Features Defining region-based defaults

Table 13 BRI and PRI line types (DTM and BRI modules) (Continued)

Digital trunk types Description


BRI ISDN loop that provides both T, S and U2 and U4 (region-specific) reference point
loops.
These loops can support both network (T and S loops) and terminal equipment
(S loop) connections.
This type of line provides incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network.
ETSI ISDN BRI is the European Telecommunications Standards Institute
specification for BRI ISDN service. BRI provides two bearer B-channels operating
at 64 kbits/s and a data D-channel which operates at 16 kbits/s. The D-channel is
used primarily to carry call information. Like loop start trunks, BRI lines can be
configured as manual-answer or auto-answer.
DASS2 (British) Trunk provides multi-line IDA interconnection to the British Telecom
network.
DPNSS (international term: Q.Sig or Q.931) a digital private network signaling system
which allows phone systems from different manufacturers to be tied together over
E1 lines, offering significant enhancements to BCM50 networking capabilities.
DPNSS makes it easier to support centralized network functionality within private
networks, for operators and attendants dealing with large numbers of calls. Its
routing capabilities provide more of the larger-network capabilities without the
expense of installing a new system, re-configuring all the nodes and worrying
about a lot of downtime. Most functionality over DPNSS lines is transparent once
the DPNSS is programmed into the system.
DPNSS allows a local node, acting as a terminating node, to communicate with
other PBXs over the network using E1 lines. For example, corporate offices
separated geographically can be linked over DPNSS lines to other BCM50
systems, bypassing the restrictions of the PSTNs to which they may be
connected. This allows connected BCM50 systems to function like a private
network.
Analog trunk types
Public Provides potential access for any set on the system.
Private Provides potential access for a specific set.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


253
Defining region-based defaults Section 3: Features

CallPilot regions
The CallPilot portion of the BCM50 application also has a region setting that defines some
call-management-related system defaults.

The CallPilot region is specified at system initialization and start up when you run the Quick Start
Wizard. You can also change this setting under System, Identification.

Table 68 lists the default prime language for the countries (regions) where the voice mail
application is supported.

Table 14 CallPilot region default languages by country

Default voice mail Default voice mail


Country Country
language language
North America NA English Germany German
UK UK English Global NA English
Australia NA English Italy Italian
Denmark Danish Norway Norwegian
Holland Dutch Spain Spanish
Sweden Swedish Switzerland German
France Euro French Hong Kong NA English
CALA LA Spanish PRC Mandarin (Taiwan)
Caribbean NA English Taiwan Mandarin (Taiwan)
Europe UK English Brazil Portuguese

The following list is the default settings that are the same for all CallPilot regions:

• Application name string VM

• Group list lead digit 9

• Country log header Access version: %s VM version:

• SC maximum lines 10_20 334

• TA Admin Name Voice Mail

• AMIS enabled

• Bilingualism enabled

• digital network access enabled

• Fax feature available enabled

• AMIS address start key #

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


254
Section 3: Features Defining region-based defaults

• Operator Revert key 0

• Touch Tone Gateway disabled

• Maximum CLID entry 16

• Maximum network length 16

Table 69 lists the feature default settings that differ among the CallPilot regions.

Table 15 CallPilot feature default anomalies

Regions Mail box Alternate Max local National Number Maximum CLID display
login QZ mapping number length Length
** 88 True 7 8 11 8 9 10 11 7 8 9 16
False
Australia 9 9 9 9 9
CALA 9 9 9 9 9
Caribbean 9 9 9 9 9
Denmark 9 9 9 9 9
Europe 9 9 9 9 9
France 9 9 9 9 9
Germany 9 9 9 9 9
Global 9 9 9 9 9
Holland 9 9 9 9 9
Hong Kong 9 9 9 9 9
Italy 9 9 9 9 9
North 9 9 9 9 9
America
Norway 9 9 9 9 9
PRC 9 9 9 9 9
Spain 9 9 9 9 9
Sweden 9 9 9 9 9
Switzerland 9 9 9 9 9
Taiwan 9 9 9 9 9
UK 9 9 9 9 9

N0027146 [Publish Date]


255

Section 3: Features

System features and feature codes

This section contains two lists:

• “BCM50 feature codes” on page 256 which contains a complete list of the feature codes that
can be accessed from digital and IP telephones.

• “Button programming features” on page 260 which contains a list of the features that are
programmable under the DN record Button Programming heading.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


256
Section 3: Features System features and feature codes

BCM50 feature codes


This section provides a quick reference for BCM50 features available by pressing the FEATURE
button on M-series telephones, Business Series Terminals (BST T-series), and IP telephones.
Table 70 provides feature names sorted in alphabetical order and numerically, by feature code.

Refer to the user documentation for the specific product to find out how to use the codes on each
type of telephone.

Table 1 Features sorted by feature name and by activation code


Sorted by feature name Sorted by activation code
Feature name FEATURE FEATURE Description
<code> <code>
Alarm time (room set) 875 0 Speed Dial - Activate
Alarm time - Cancel #875 *0 Button inquiry
Alarm time (HS admin set) 877 1 Messages - Send
Autodial - External *1 #1 Messages - Cancel Send
Autodial - Internal *2 *1 Autodial - External
Auto Hold 73 2 Ring Again
Auto Hold - Cancel #73 #2 Ring Again - Cancel
Background Music 86 *2 Autodial - Internal
Background Music - Cancel #86 3 Conference Call
Button inquiry *0 *3 Memory buttons - Program
Call Center agent login/log out 904 4 Call Forward
Call Center agent make busy/ready 908 #4 Call Forward - Cancel
Call Center queue status 909 *4 Speed Dial - Add, change
Call Charge Indication 818 5 Last Number Redial
Call Duration Timer 77 *501 Language - Primary1
Call Forward 4 *502 Language - Alternate1
Call Forward - Cancel #4 *503 Language - Alternate 21
Call Forward to Voice Mail 984 *504 Language - Alternate 31
Time zone readjust (IP
Call Information 811 *510
telephones)
Call Log - Delete items (Auto bumping) 815 *503 Language - Alternate 21
Call Log - Manual 813 *520 Find available SWCA
Call Log - View information 812 *521 to System Wide Call Appearance
Call Log options *84 *536 (SWCA)
Call Log password *85 *537 Find oldest SWCA
Call Park 74 *538 Find newest SWCA
Call Queuing 801 *550 Silent Monitor
Camp-on 82 *6 Ring Type
Call Log password *85 60 Page

N0027146 [Publish Date]


257
System features and feature codes Section 3: Features

Table 1 Features sorted by feature name and by activation code (Continued)


Sorted by feature name Sorted by activation code
Feature name FEATURE FEATURE Description
<code> <code>
Page - Internal (telephone
Class of Service 68 61
speakers)
Page - External (external
Conference Call 3 62
speakers)
Page - Combined (internal &
Contrast adjustment *7 63
external)
Dialing Mode *82 64 Line Pool
Call Log options *84 65 Messages - View
Directed Pickup 76 66 Voice Call
Display Voice Mail DN, skillset or IVR 985 67 Saved Number Redial
DN
Do not Disturb 85 68 Class of Service
Do not Disturb - Cancel #85 69 Priority Call
Exclusive Hold 79 *7 Contrast adjustment
Express Messaging 980 70 Transfer
Group Listening 802 #70 Transfer - Cancel
Group Listening - Cancel #802 71 Link
Group Pickup 75 73 Auto Hold
IP Services list *900 #73 Auto Hold - Cancel
IP Hot desking *999 74 Call Park
Language - Primary 1 *501 75 Group Pickup
Language - Alternate 1 *502 76 Directed Pickup
Language - Alternate 2 1 *503 77 Call Duration Timer
Language - Alternate 3 1 *504 78 Pause
Last Number Redial 5 79 Exclusive Hold
Line buttons - Move *81 *80 Ring Volume
Line Pool 64 *81 Line buttons - Move
Line Redirection 84 82 Camp-on
Line Redirection - Cancel #84 83 Privacy (on/off)
Link 71 84 Line Redirection
Long tones 808 #84 Line Redirection - Cancel
Malicious call identification (MCID) 897 *84 Call Log options
Memory buttons - Program *3 85 Do not Disturb
Messages - Send 1 #85 Do not Disturb - Cancel
Messages - Cancel Send #1 *85 Call Log password
Messages - View 65 86 Background Music
Name and number blocking 819 #86 Background Music - Cancel

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


258
Section 3: Features System features and feature codes

Table 1 Features sorted by feature name and by activation code (Continued)


Sorted by feature name Sorted by activation code
Feature name FEATURE FEATURE Description
<code> <code>
Name and number blocking - Cancel #819 88 Voice Call Deny
Page 60 #88 Cancel Voice Call Deny
Page - Combined (internal & external) 63 800 Trunk Answer
Page - External (external speakers) 62 801 Call Queuing
Page - Internal (telephone speakers) 61 802 Group Listening
Pause 78 #802 Group Listening - Cancel
Priority Call 69 803 Time
Privacy (on/off) 83 804 Wait for dial tone
Record call 989 805 Test telephone display
Ring Again 2 806 Static Time
Ring Again - Cancel #2 #806 Static Time - Cancel
Ring Type *6 807 Ringing (Signal) Call
Ring Volume *80 808 Long tones
Name and number blocking -
Ringing (Signal) Call 807 #809
Cancel
Room condition (Room set) 876 811 Call Information
Room condition (HS admin set) 878 812 Call Log - View information
Room occupancy 879 813 Call Log - Manual
Call Log - Delete items
Run/Stop *9 815
(autobumping)
Saved Number Redial 67 818 Call Charge Indication
Silent Monitoring *550 819 Name and number blocking
Speed Dial - Add, change *4 870 Viewing active services
Speed Dial - Activate 0 #871 Turning Ringing service off
Static Time 806 871 Turning Ringing service on
Static Time - Cancel #806 #872 Turning Restriction service off
*521 to 872 Turning Restriction service on
System Wide Call Appearance (SWCA)
*536 873 Turning Routing service on2
Find available SWCA *520 #873 Turning Routing service off
Find oldest SWCA *537 875 Alarm time
Find newest SWCA *538 #875 Alarm time - Cancel
Test telephone display 805 876 Room condition (Room set)
Time 803 877 Alarm time (HS admin)
Time zone adjust (IP telephones) *510 878 Room condition (HS admin)
Transfer 70 879 Room occupancy

N0027146 [Publish Date]


259
System features and feature codes Section 3: Features

Table 1 Features sorted by feature name and by activation code (Continued)


Sorted by feature name Sorted by activation code
Feature name FEATURE FEATURE Description
<code> <code>
Malicious call identification
Transfer - Cancel #70 897
(MCID)
Transfer to mailbox 986 *9 Run/Stop
Trunk Answer 800 *900 IP Services list
Turning Restriction service off #872 904 Call Center agent login/log out
Call Center agent make busy/
Turning Restriction service on 872 908
ready
Turning Ringing service off #871 909 Call Center queue status
Turning Ringing service on 871 980 Express Messaging
Turning Routing service off #873 981 Voice Mail login
Turning Routing service on 2 873 982 Voice Mail Operator settings
View active services 870 984 Call Forward to Voice Mail
Voice Call 66 Display Voice Mail DN, skillset,
985
Voice Call Deny 88 or IVR DN
Voice Call Deny - Cancel #88 986 Transfer to mailbox
Voice Mail direct 988 987 Voice Mail Interrupt
Voice Mail Interrupt 987 988 Voice Mail direct
Voice Mail login 981 989 Record call
Voice Mail Operator settings 982 *999 IP Hot desking
Wait for dial tone 804
Notes
2Contact your System Administrator for the service control password.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


260
Section 3: Features System features and feature codes

Button programming features


This section describes the features available for Button Programming. (Services, Telephony
Services, System DNs, Available DNs, DN<number>, User Preferences,
Button Programming, Button ##).

Note that some of these features need other system settings in order to work.

• Some of the buttons are controlled by features located under Services, Telephony Services,
System DNs, Available DNs, DNxx, Capabilities). Paging is an example of a feature that
requires other settings.

• Some features also require that the service be available on the line from your telephone service
provider. The types of lines provided are also determined by what region is chosen for your
system. MCID (malicious call identification) is an example of this type of feature.

Table 2 Button Programming Feature settings

Set
command
Feature Description
(FEATURE
<code>)
None Button is configured for button programming, but nothing has
been entered.
0 Speed dial This button activates the speed dial feature. The telephone
prompts the user for a speed dial code.
1 Send Message Send a message to another set within the network.
#1 Cancel Send Message Cancel a message you sent to another set within the network.
2 Ring again Sets Ring again feature.
3 Conference/Transfer Initiates a call between three parties.
4 Call Forward Allows the user to enter a number to call forward current
telephone.
5 Last number redial Causes set to redial the last number it received.
60 Page - General Allows the user to page all sets.
61 Page - Zone Allows the user to page a specific zone which is identified within
the Button programming.
62 Page - Speaker Allows the user to page through the speaker on a specific
telephone.
63 Page - Speaker and Allows the user to page through the speaker on telephones in a
zone specific zone, which is identified within Button programming.
64 Line Pool Allows the user to access a line pool. Either specific pools
assigned to the telephone, or other general pools. The pool this
button accesses is specified during Button Programming for this
feature.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


261
System features and feature codes Section 3: Features

Table 2 Button Programming Feature settings (Continued)

Set
command
Feature Description
(FEATURE
<code>)
65 Reply message Allows the user to access messages and send a reply to the
message sender.
#65 Cancel Message Allows the user to cancel the message waiting indicator.
Waiting
66 Voice call Allows the user to make an announcement or begin a call through
the speaker of another telephone.
67 Saved Number Redial Allows the user to redial a number that they saved while on the
call.
68 Restriction override Allows the user to override any restrictions for the call they are
trying to dial.
69 Priority Call Allows the user to access a telephone that is currently busy.
70 Transfer Allows the user to transfer an existing call to another telephone.
71 Link Activates the Link command, which allows the user to access
special features on a remote PBX system.
72 Timed Release (NOT ACTIVE)
74 Call Park Allows the user to park a call on another telephone in the system.
*520 Find available SWCA System will search for a free SWCA key among the SWCA keys
key that are assigned to the current telephone.
*521 to *536 System Wide Call Non-intercom calls are associated with an available SWCA key
Appearance (1 to 16) when the call is answered or originated, or put on Hold.
Features that interact with this feature: Hold, telephone keys,
outgoing and incoming calls.
*537 Find oldest SWCA call System will search among the SWCA keys assigned to the
telephone, and unpark the call that has been parked the longest.
*538 Find newest SWCA System will search among the SWCA keys assigned to the
call telephone, and unpark the call that has been most recently
parked.
*550 Silent Monitor Monitor hunt group calls. (Telephone must be assigned with SM
supervisor.)
75 Group Pickup Allows the user to answer a call made to another set within the
Pickup group.
76 Directed Pickup Allows the user to answer any telephone that rings within the
system.
77 Call Timer Allows the user to see how long a call lasted.
78 Pause Allows the user to insert a pause during a dialing sequence.
79 Exclusive Hold Allows the user to put a call on hold at the current telephone. All
appearances of the call on other telephones indicate the line is
busy.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


262
Section 3: Features System features and feature codes

Table 2 Button Programming Feature settings (Continued)

Set
command
Feature Description
(FEATURE
<code>)
800 Trunk Answer Allows the user to answer a ringing call placed in a service mode.
801 Call Queuing Allows the user to answer calls in order when several calls occur
at once. Calls are presented in this order: incoming calls,
timed-out forwarded calls, then camped calls.
802 Group Listening This feature opens the microphone on the set to allow a group of
people to hear a call through the telephone speaker, but the user
must talk to the caller through the handset.
803 Time Displays the current time.
804 Wait for Dialtone Places a pause in a dialing string that holds the following digits
until a dialtone is perceived on the line.
807 Ringing (Signal) Call Enter FEATURE 807 and an extension to directly ring another
telephone inside the system. This is the same process as
pressing an intercom button and dialing an extension.
808 Long tones Allows the user to specify the type of tones dialed out.
811 Call Information Allows the user to view information about a current call.
812 Call Log - View Allows the user to view call log information.
Information
813 Call Log - Manual Allows the user to manually active call logging.
815 Call Logs Allows the user to manually remove the oldest log item.
autobumping
818 Call Charge Indication Allows the user to view the charges for a call. (available on
DASS2 and ETSI Euro trunks only)
819 ONN blocking Allows the user to block the call information from the telephone
for an outgoing call.
82 Camp-on Allows the user to transfer and park an external call to another
telephone in the system.
83 Privacy Control Allows the user to make a shared line private, or release a shared
line from private control.
84 Line Redirection Allows the user to redirect a line within the system.
85 Do Not Disturb Allows the user to block incoming calls from ringing on the
telephone.
86 Background music Allows the user to play music provided by a background music
source through the speaker on the telephone.
870 Service Mode Status Allows the user to view the current service mode being used.
871 Ringing Service Allows the user to change the ringing service schedule.
872 Restriction Service Allows the user to change the restriction service schedule.
873 Routing Service Allows the user to change the routing service schedule.

N0027146 [Publish Date]


263
System features and feature codes Section 3: Features

Table 2 Button Programming Feature settings (Continued)

Set
command
Feature Description
(FEATURE
<code>)
88 Voice Call Deny Allows the user to turn off the voice call feature at their set.
897 MCID (Malicious Call Identification)
Allows the user to query the system for information about a call
within 25 seconds after the user hangs up, but before the caller
hangs up.
*501 Language Choice Access a menu to choose what language you want a telephone
to use for display prompts.
7 Contrast Digital telephones: Set the level of contrast for the telephone
display.
904 ACD agent login/log Allows the user to log in or out of ACD (Attendant Console
out Directory).
908 ACD agent make Allows the user to indicate ready or busy status on ACD.
busy/ready
909 ACD queue status Allows the user to view the status of queued calls on ACD.
980 Express Messaging Allows the user to log directly into voice mail to leave a message.
981 Voice Mail Login Opens your mailbox to play your messages and to access
mailbox options.
982 Voice Mail Operator Allows the user to set the parameters for the voice mail operator.
settings
984 Call forward to voice Forwards incoming calls to your mailbox.
mail (Available for the Norstar Voice Mail interface only.)
985 Display voice mail DN Displays the voice mail, skill set, or IVR extension number.
986 Transfer to mailbox Transfers calls to a mailbox on the CallPilot system.
987 Voice mail interrupt Intercepts a caller who is listening to your mailbox greeting or
leaving a message.
988 Voice mail direct ???????????
989 Record call ?????????/
*900 IP Services List IP telephones only.
Allows the user to access a feature menu. This is the same menu
that is accessed by pressing the Services key.
*999 IP Hot Desking IP telephones only.
Allows the user to access the hot desking feature. This feature
allows calls to be diverted from one IP telephone to another.

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


264
Section 3: Features System features and feature codes

N0027146 [Publish Date]


265

Index
Numerics
2002
default button programming 148
3-port switch
IP telephones 133
relocating IP telephones 237
7000
button defaults 145
7100
button defaults 145
Ring Again 194
Transferring a call 197
7208
button defaults 144
7316, button defaults 143
7316E
button defaults 141
CAP station 129
configuring an eCAP 131
7406
button defaults 146
A
ACD
agent busy/ready (908) 263
agent log in/log out (904) 263
queue status (909) 263
activation code, features 256
active calls, deregistering disruption 123
active services, view (870) 259
agent busy/ready (908) 256, 263
agent login/log out, ACD (904) 263
agent login-log out (904) 256
alarm
messages 22
telephone, identify 22
alarm codes, reporting 206
alarm telephone
reporting alarms 206
Alarm time
at telephone (875) 256
cancel (#875) 256
Hospitality Services admin set (877) 256

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


266

allow last number redial 113


allow link 113
allow redirect
allow/disallow 104
Embark switch, call forward 81
allow saved number redial 113
alpha tagging
caller ID set 97
Maximum CLI per line 21
alternate language
first (*502) 257
second (*503) 257
third (*504) 257
analog lines
voice message indicator 97
analog telephones
message reply enhancement 20
receiving short tones 104
answer DNs
answer key settings 21
appearances 99
auto dial feature 77
Call Center warning 21
Directed Pickup 159
overview 161
programming 99
restrictions 22
answer key
autodial feature 77
answer keys
Answer DNs 161
basic, enhanced, extended 21
Call Center warning 21
answer keys, see answer DNs 22
answering calls
Answer other telephones 161
Call Pickup 159
Conference Calls 215
Trunk Answer 160
appear and ring, telephone line assignment 96
appear only, telephone line assignment 96
appearance type
line assignments 96
appearances, line assignments 96
appearances, telephone line assignment 96

N0027146
267

ASM
message indicator 107
ATA
answer timer 107
GASM disconnect supervision 108
location setting 107
tones 107
ATA Dvc
ATA 107
ATA2
ATA answer timer 107
ATA tones 107
ATA use 107
message indicator 107
Auto called ID 101
auto dial
memory buttons 220
auto dumping
call log 179
Auto Hold (73) 256
auto hold for incoming page 103
auto hold, allow/disallow 104
autobumping, call log (815) 256, 262
auto-dial
Force auto/spd dial over ic/conf 20
autodial
answer DNs 77
button programming 110
external (*1) 256
internal (*2) 256
overview 219
automatic
Call Log 82
Hold 166
automatic dial 154
automatic dial, dialing options 105
automatic for life of call, SWCA keys 25
auxiliary ringer
Directed Pickup 159
hunt groups 52
overview 234
programming 46
telephone programming 106
auxiliary services
background music 234

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


268

ringer 234
B
background music
at telephone (86) 256
cancel (#86) 256
on Hold 20
on telephone (86) 262
overview 234
programming 20
block calls
DND on busy 163
Do Not Disturb, overview 163
privacy 164
block IP telephone dialout 123
blocking call, at telephone (819) 262
blocking calls
intrusion controls 165
BRI
line types 251
broadcast mode 51
BST doorphone
overview 234
busy
hunt group options 51
priority call code (69) 261
busy signal
overview 210
busy tone
hunt groups 51
button defaults 139
7000 145
7100 telephone 145
7208 telephone 144
7316 telephone 143
7316E 141
7406 telephone 146
button inquiry
*0 256
button programming
answer keys 21
features list 260
internal autodial 110
buttons
activate memory programming (*3) 257
answer key 161

N0027146
269

memory 219
move line buttons (*81) 257
C
call
duration 176
call buttons, SWCA 25
Call Center
agent busy/ready (908) 256
agent login-log out (904) 256
Answer DN warning 21
queue request (909) 256
call charge (818) 256, 262
call display
call log note 83
programming 101
call duration (77) 261
Call Forward
activate (4) 260
activate at telephone (4) 256
all calls, hunt groups 188
cancel at telephone (#4) 256
no answer, hunt groups 188
to voice mail 171
to voice mail (984) 256, 263
call forward
DPNSS Embark switch 81
Call information
accessing (811) 256
Call information, current call (811) 262
Call Log
autobumping (815) 262
automatic 82
delete items at telephone (815) 256
manual (813) 256
manually activate (813) 262
MCID (897) 257
options 106
options (*84) 256
password (*85) 256
space 101
space, reallocating 177
telephone 82
using 82
view (812) 262
view information (812) 256

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


270

call log
auto dumping 179
display prompts 205
feature codes 178
overview 177
Call Park
parking a call (74) 256
parking from a telephone (74) 261
Call Pickup
Directed Pickup 159
Group Pickup 159
Call Queuing
at telephone (801) 262
Call Queuing (801) 256
call routing
overflow routing 40
call timer, see call duration (77) 261
Call Transfer 168
callback
no answer 174
timer, network 24
transfer timer 24
caller ID
by region 242
MCID at telephone (897) 263
Caller ID set
alpha tagging 97
CallPilot
languages by region 253
transfer to mail box (986) 263
calls
assign SWCA key to calls 25
SWCA overview 174
Camp timeout delay 24
camp-on
intrusion controls 103
using at a telephone (82) 256
using at telephone (82) 262
cancel
message waiting (#65) 261
send message (#1) 260
CAP
7316E/KIM 129
configuring as eCAP 131
configuring buttons 132

N0027146
271

line assignment 75
moving a set 131
using 186
capabilities
auto hold for incoming page 103
OLI as called number 104
programming 100, 102
SM supervision 104
Central America, supported languages 241
central answering position (see CAP) 186
change DNs 88
charge, call information (818) 262
CLID
caller ID set 97
Maximum CLI per line 21
OLI and line pools 94
view information 176
communicating in the office
sending messages, overview 211
companding laws, by region 242
conference
by releasing privacy 216
initiate (3) 257, 260
overview 215
tone, allow/disallow 20
configure
DN record 121
IP server parameters 120
restart to 119
review information 122
Connecting to Server 121
contrast
adjust (7) 257
programming 105
contrast level, IP telephones 123
control set
see also, control telephone 101
control telephone
overview 182
copy
telephone settings 87
copyright 2
core software, regions 240
COS
password (68) 257

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


272

current call information (811) 262


current time (803) 262
customize, feature labels 225
cycle park codes, park mode 21
D
default
7100 buttons 145
7208 144
7316 buttons 143
7406 buttons 146
button assignment 139
Hunt group DN 50
default buttons
2002 148
i2004 147
Default gateway, IP telephones 120
defaults
buttons 141
delay
Camp timeout 24
host delay timer 24
link timer 24
Park timeout 24
ring transfer 21
deny
voice call (88) 263
deregister, IP telephones 123
Desktop Assistant 84
DHCP
IP telephones 120
VLAN on IP telephones 121
dial
insert Link (71) 257
insert pause (78) 258
dial tone
wait (804) 259
dial tone, wait 222
dialing
automatic dial 154
insert pause (78) 261
Link signal 222
mode (*82) 257
options 105
Pause signal 222
run/stop 222

N0027146
273

standard dial 154


dialing plan
profile defaults 250
dialing restrictions
line/set restriction 115
telephone 113
dialling
pre-dial 154
dialtone, wait for (804) 262
direct dial telephone
overview 186
direct-dial digit
allow/disallow 103
direct-dial telephone
sending messages 20
Directed Pickup
answering from any telephone (76) 261
feature settings 21
pick up code (76) 159, 257
discarded calls, call log 82
disconnect supervision
GASM 108
display
voice mail DN (985) 263
display contrast 154
display keys, configuration 119
display prompts
call log 205
common 192
viewing active service 205
Display Voice Mail DN (985) 257
distinct ring
hunt groups 52
in use, telephone programming 105
distribution modes, Hunt groups 51
DND on busy
hunt groups 188
initiating (85) 262
programming 103
DNs
assigning line pool access 98
auto-assign IP telephones 121
button programming 109, 139
changing 88
dialing restrictions 113

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


274

display voice mail DN (985) 263


Hunt groups 50
ISDN feature support 102
user preferences, model 110
Do Not Disturb
activate (85) 257
cancel (#85) 257
initiating (85) 262
on Busy 163
overview 163
doorphone
overview, BST 234
download
firmware 231
DPNSS lines, Embark switch 81
duplicate system DNs 87
E
E1
CALA 240
Euro 240
Global 240
ECAP restore issue 76
Embark switch
call forward 81
DPNSS lines 81
validation errors 81
ethernet connection, IP telephones 134
ETSI
MCID feature 177
evening schedule 39
Exclusive Hold (79) 167, 257, 261
express messaging into voice mail (980) 263
Expressing messaging (980) 257
external
hotline 106
to target line 163
external #
autodial 111
user speed dial 111
external paging
equipment 212
extra dial telephone 41
extra lines, CAP module 75
F
facility

N0027146
275

hotline programming 106


user speed dial 111
fax
ATA answer timer 107
FEATURE
*550 28
activate speed dial 0 219
auto dumping 815 179
Background music 86 234
call log feature codes 178
change user speed dial *4 219
Do Not Disturb (85) 163
Do Not Disturb on Busy (85) 163
Exclusive Hold (79) 167
Group Listening 802 158
MCID 897 177
paging (60 - 63) 212
privacy (83) 164
sorted by name and activation code 256
start conference 3 215
Trunk Answer (800) 160
feature
button programming 110, 260
Call Pickup 159
Call Transfer 168
Conference Calls 215
Hold, also see SWCA and Park 166
hunt groups 188
Line Redirection 81
features
programming memory buttons 220
using 153
features list 223
firewall
IP configuration note 123
firmware
downloading to IP telephones 231
first display 101
Force auto/spd dial over ic/conf 20
force download 231
Forward on busy
DND on Busy 163
forwarding calls
Do Not Disturb on Busy 163
Line Redirection 81

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


276

full set lock 113


Fwd no answer delay 95
Fwd no answer to 95
Fwd on busy to 95
G
gateway
IP telephones 120
General settings
answer keys 21
associate SWCA key to call 25
background music 20
conference tone 20
delayed ring transfer 21
directed pickup allow 21
Force auto/spd dial over ic/conf 20
Held reminder 20
Hold 20
identify alarm telephone 22
include I/C calls when auto associating 25
include I/C calls when invoking by Hold 26
Maximum CLI per line 21
network callback timer 24
page tone, allow 20
receiver volume 21
set relocation 22
Global 240
Group listening
activate (802) 257
at telephone (802) 262
cancel (#802) 257
Group Pickup
activating (75) 159, 257
answering from a telephone (75) 261
hunt groups 188
H
handling many calls
Hold 166
handsfree
programming 102
handsfree answerback
programming 103
headset
volume 155
Held reminder 20
Hold

N0027146
277

auto hold code (73) 256


auto hold control 104
automatic 166
exclusive 167
exclusive hold (79) 257
exclusive hold at telephone (79) 261
handling calls 166
held reminder settings 20
invoke SWCA parking by hold 26
tones, music, or silence 20
hospitality
programming overview 184
Host delay, timer 24
host signaling link 113
host system signaling
pause 222
hot desking
change password 229
hot desking (999) 257
hotline
facility 106
numbers 106
overview 181
hunt delay 51
hunt group
monitoring with IP telephones 62
Hunt groups
auxiliary ringer 52
Broadcast mode 51
distinct rings 52
distribution modes 51
DN, default value 50
feature operation 188
hunt delay timer 51
if busy 51
Linear mode 51
monitoring mode 28
moving members 54
name 50
queue time-out 51
Rotary mode 51
SM password 28
SM sets 28
hunt groups
overflow constraints 22

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


278

programming overview 188


SM supervision 104
I
i2001
feature labels 225
keep DN alive 237
server parameters 120
i2002
feature labels 225
keep DN alive 237
server parameters 120
i2004
default button programming 147
feature labels 225
keep DN alive 237
server parameters 120
i2050
default button programming 147
i2050 Software Phone
keep DN alive 237
server parameters 120
incoming calls, tracking 177
information
caller, call logs 82
current call (811) 262
Installation
3-port switch 133
configuration display keys 119
initialization, IP telephones 121
IP telephone server parameters 120
restart to configure 119
intercom
assign lines 100
Include I/C calls when auto associating, SWCA 25
Include I/C calls when invoking by Hold, SWCA 26
internal
autodial button programming 110
hotline 106
internal autodial
button programming 110
internet, 3-way switch 133
interrupt voice mail (987) 263
intrusion
programming 103
intrustion controls

N0027146
279

overview 165
Invalid Server Address 122
IP address conflict 122
IP Hot desking (999) 257
IP music
background music overview 234
IP Services list (900) 257
IP telephones
3-port switch 133
block single telephone 123
codecs
viewing 122
contrast level 123
deregister 123
deregistering
online sets 123
display keys for configuration 119
does not connect 123
ethernet connection 134
feature labels 225
firmware, downloading 231
hunt group note 62
Invalid server address 122
Keep DN Alive 237
keep DN alive 108
New telephone 122
No ports left 122
Published IP address 120
register prompt 121
Registration disabled 122
relocating 237
restart to configure 119
review configuration information 122
router IP 120
server parameters 120
Set IP, viewing 122
slow connection 123
speech paths 123
Troubleshooting 122
troubleshooting prompts 122
VLAN settings 121
IP terminal status
features list 223
ISDN
OLI as called number 104

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


280

terminal feature support 102


K
Keep DN alive 237
keep DN alive 108
KIM
CAP station 129
configuring as eKIM 131
configuring buttons 132
moving a set 131
L
labels, telephones 84
lamp, message indicator 107
language
alternate, first (*502) 257
alternate, second (*503) 257
alternate, third (*504) 257
by region 240
primary (*501) 257
programming 105
South and Central America 241
user programming 155
Last Number Redial
activating (5) 257, 260
line
BRI and PRI line types 251
first display 101
protocol by region 245
Redirection 81
line buttons, moving (*81) 257
Line pool
activate (64) 257
and OLI 94
line pool
access code from telephone (64) 260
access, assigning 98
external autodial 111
user speed dial 111
line protocol, by region 245
Line redirection
activate (84) 257
cancel (#84) 257
hunt groups 188
initiating (84) 262
line redirection
programming 80

N0027146
281

line/set restrictions
programming 115
linear mode 51
lines
Caller ID set
telephones 97
PRI line note 79
target line appearances 96
user programming 155
link
external call features 222
initiating code at telephone (71) 261
insert into dial sequence (71) 257
timer 24
listening group, at telephone (802) 262
Locating Server 121
log
all calls 106
space reallocating 177
view call log (812) 262
login to voice mail (981) 263
logit 179
Logit (see Call Log) 82
long distance call
indicator 192
Long tones
entering in dialing sequence (808) 257
specifying at telephone (808) 262
long tones
external paging 212
Loop
avoiding redirection loops 81
lunch schedule 39
M
making calls
common display prompts 192
malicious call identification
initiating (897) 263
manual
activate call log (813) 262
for life of call, SWCA keys 25
SWCA keys 25
Maximum CLI per line 21
MCDN
intrusion controls 103

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


282

MCID
overview 177
MCID (897) 257, 263
media bay modules
availability by regions 243
members
moving, Hunt group 54
memory button
activate programming (*3) 257
autodial 219
program defaults 139
memory buttons
programming at the telephone 220
message
overview 210
reply message (65) 261
message indicator
analog 107
ATA 107
message reply enhancement
allow/disallow 20
analog telephones 20
message waiting
cancel #65 261
message waiting indicator
message overview 211
messages
cancel code (#1) 260
cancel send (#1) 257
direct-dial telephones (F1) 20
express messaging into voice mail (980) 263
message reply enhancement 20
overview 211
send (1) 257
send message code (1) 260
view (65) 257
messaging, express (980) 257
model
user preferences 110
modem
ATA Dvc 107
monitoring
Answer DNs 161
transferred calls 174
monitoring mode

N0027146
283

silent monitor 28
monitoring other telephones, answer DNS 99
moving
Hunt group members 54
IP telephones 237
IP telephones, keep DN alive 108
Keep DN alive 237
line buttons (*81) 257
telephones (see automatic telephone relocation) 22
moving lines 155
moving telephones 235
music
cancel (#86) 256
playing (86) 262
turn on (86) 256
music on hold 20
MWI
voice message set on telephone 97
N
name
first display 101
hunt groups 50
name and number blocking
cancel (#819) 257
initiating (819) 257
Netmask
IP telephones 120
network callback timer 24
NEW SET 122
night schedule 39
no answer
autologging 106
no autologging 106
no connection, IP telephones 123
no speech path, IP telephones 123
number
first display 101
O
OLI as called number (ISDN) 104
OLI number, private 95
OLI number, public 94
On hold (see hold) 20
one button dialing (see Autodial) 219
one-way speech path, IP telephones 123
ONN

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


284

cancel (#819) 257


initiating (819) 257
ONN blocking
initiate at telephone (819) 262
operator, voice mail (981) 263
Originating Line Identification (OLI) and line pools 94
overflow routing
call routing 40
routing service 40
overflow, answer key settings 22
overflow, hunt groups 51
overrides
profile defaults 250
restrictions at telephone (68) 261
P
page
auto hold for incoming page 103
combined (63) 258
equipment 212
external (62) 258
external equipment 212
general (60) 260
initiate (60) 258
internal (61) 258
programming 103
speaker (62) 260
speaker and zone (63) 260
timeout timer 24
page tone 20
page zone
assigning 103
hunt groups 188
initiate (61) 260
park mode, retrieval code setting 21
Park timeout delay 24
parked call
park mode setting 21
partial, set lock 113
password
hot desking (*999) 229
Pause
in a sequence of numbers (see Wait for Dial Tone) 222
insert into dialing sequence (78) 258, 261
pause
external call feature 222

N0027146
285

pickup directed, allow 21


pickup group
assigning 102
group pickup (76) 159
playing music through telephone (86) 262
pre-dial 105
predial 154
PRI
line types 251
primary
language (*501) 257
prime line
external autodial 111
hotline 106
telephone programming 100
user speed dial 111
prime telephone
delayed ring transfer 21
overview 186
priority call
(69) 258, 261
allow/disallow 103
hunt groups 188
overview 210
Privacy
(83) 258, 262
privacy
overview 164
program buttons, default assignment 139
programming
System DNs 71
programming system features
System Speed Dial 219
programming telephones
Call Pickup 159
prompts, IP telephones, configuration 122
Protect level, intrusion controls 103
Published IP address
IP telephones 120
Q
queue
hunt groups 51
time-out 51
queue request (909) 256
queue status, ACD (909) 263

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


286

queuing calls, initiating (801) 262


R
reallocating log space 177
receiver volume 21
user programming 155
receiving calls
SWCA overview 174
redial
last number (5) 260
saved number (67) 258, 261
redirect
line, initiating redirection (84) 262
redirect ring
allow/disallow 104
redirection loops, avoiding 81
regions
caller ID 242
CallPilot 253
companding law 242
core software 240
languages 240
line protocol 245
modules 243
voice mail feature defaults 254
register
IP telephones 121
Registration Disabled 122
regulatory information 2
relocating
CAP module 131
IP telephones 237
Keep DN alive 237
KIM 131
relocating telephones 22, 235
reminder, held line 20
reply message (65) 261
reporting alarm codes 206
restriction filter
profile defaults 250
restriction schedules, telephones 114
restriction service, changing at telephone (872) 262
Restriction services
turning off (#872) 259
turning on (872) 259
restriction services

N0027146
287

line/set restrictions 115


programming 113
restrictions
overriding at telephone (68) 261
telephone record 113
retrieval code, park mode 21
ring again
activate (2) 258, 260
cancel (#2) 258
hunt groups 188
overview 210
ring groups
extra dial set 41
services 44
trunk answer 44
ring only, telephone line assignment 96
ring transfer, delayed 21
Ring Type
changing (*6) 258
user preferences 105
ring volume 156
Ring Volume (*80) 258
ringing
call (807) 258
Directed Pickup 159
signal call at telephone (807) 262
Trunk Answer 160
ringing services
auxiliary ringer 46
changing at telephone (871) 262
programming 43
ring group 46
ring groups 44
trunk answer 41
turning off (#871) 259
turning on (871) 259
Room condition
HS admin set (878) 258
room set (876) 258
Room occupancy
HS admin set (879) 258
rotary mode 51
router
IP telephones 120
routing

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


288

services 40
Routing services
turning off (#873) 259
turning on (873) 259
routing services
turning on (873) 262
routing table
external autodial 111
hotline 106
user speed dial 111
Run/Stop code (*9) 258
S
S1 Action 120
S1 IP 120
S1 Port 120
S1 RETRY Count 120
S2 Action 120
S2 IP 120
S2 Port 120
S2 RETRY Count 120
Saved Number Redial (67) 258, 261
schedules
control telephone 182
ringing services 43
routing service, overflow 40
send message code (1) 260
SERVER NO PORTS LEFT 122
server parameters 120
SERVER UNREACHABLE. RESTARTING 122
service mode status (870) 262
service schedules
control telephone 182
services
changing restrictions at telephone (872) 262
changing ringing at telephone (871) 262
changing routing at telephone (873) 262
extra dial set 41
line/set restrictions 115
programming auxiliary ringer 46
programming ring groups 46
Restriction services (872, on/#872, off) 259
ringing 43
Ringing services (871, on/#871, off) 259
Routing services (873, on/#873, off) 259
Schedule 1, night 39

N0027146
289

schedule 2, evening 39
schedule 3, lunch 39
schedule 4 39
service mode status at telephone (870) 262
Trunk Answer 160
trunk answer, ringing services 41
view active services (870) 259
services list, IP telephones (900) 257
Set IP 120
set lock
dialing restrictions 113
set log space 101
set relocation 22, 235
short tones 104
signal
call (807), see also Ringing call 258
Link 222
Pause 222
run/stop 222
signal call, ringing at telephone (807) 262
silent monitor
FEATURE *550 28
monitoring mode 28
programming overview 183
SM password 28
SM sets 28
SM supervision 104
slow connection, IP telephones 123
SM password
silent monitor 28
SM sets
silent monitor 28
SM supervision 104
South America, supported languages 241
special features
hospitality 184
hunt groups 188
silent monitor 183
special telephones
control telephone 182
direct dial telephone 186
hotline 181
prime telephone 186
speed dial
activate (0) 258

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


290

activate feature (0) 260


add/change (*4) 258
Force auto-spd dial over ic/conf 20
user programming 111
standard dial 105, 154
static time (806) 258
status
service mode on telephone (870) 262
supervision
GASM disconnect supervision 108
SWCA
associate SWCA key to call 25
auto hold control 104
autohold 166
button codes (*520 to *535) 261
Include I/C calls when auto associating 25
Include I/C calls when invoking by Hold 26
invoke SWCA parking by hold 26
memory buttons 220
memory codes (*520 to *535) 258
overview 174
system
line redirection 80
speed dialing 219
System DNs
copying settings 87
system programming
user speed dials 111
T
T1 Etiquette 240
T1CT2 Plus 240
target line
external call, DND 163
target lines
appearances 96
Telephon, ATA Dvc setting 107
telephone
log calls automatically 82
test display (805) 258
telephone programming
alarm telephone 22
allow last number (redial) 113
allow link feature 113
allow redirect 104
allow saved number (redial) 113

N0027146
291

allow/disallow direct-dial 103


answer DNs 99
Associate SWCA key to call 25
ATA answer timer 107
ATA Dvc 107
ATA tones 107
ATA use 107
ATA, answer timer 107
ATA, use 107
Auto called ID 101
auto hold 104
auxiliary ringer 106
button features list 260
button programming 109, 139
call forward on busy 95
call forward, delay timer 95
call forward, no answer 95
call log options 106
camp timeout timer 24
Capabilities 100, 102
change DNs 88
contrast 105
control sets 101
dialing options 105
distinct ring in use 105
DND on busy 103
external autodial button 111
feature 110
first display 101
GASM disconnect supervision 108
handsfree 102
handsfree answerback 103
hotline 106
Include I/C calls when auto associating 25
Include I/C calls when invoking by Hold 26
intercom keys 100
internal autodial 110
intrusion controls 103
Invoke SWCA parking by Hold 26
keep DN alive 108
language 105
line pool access 98
line/set restrictions 115
link timer 24
message indicator 107

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


292

page timeout timer 24


page zone 103
paging 103
park timeout 24
pickup group 102
prime line 100
priority call, allow/disallow 103
Private OLI number 95
Public OLI number 94
receive short tones 104
redirect ring 104
relocating 22
restriction scheduling 114
restrictions 113
ring type 105
set lock 113
Set log space 101
telephone restrictions 114
transfer callback timeout timer 24
user preferences 105
user programming access 113
user speed dialing 111
telephone restrictions, scheduling 114
telephones 206
call log display prompts 205
caller ID for target and analog CLID lines 97
common display prompts 192
PRI line note 79
relocating 235
viewing active service prompts 205
voice message set 97
template, button assignments 141
time
current (803) 258
display current time (803) 262
static (806) 258
time savers
autodial 219
Speed Dial 219
time zones, by country 247
timeout
camp timeout timers 24
page timeout timer 24
park timeout timer 24
transfer callback timer 24

N0027146
293

timers
camp timeout 24
Host delay 24
hunt delay 51
hunt group queue time-out 51
link 24
network callback 24
page timeout 24
park timeout 24
transfer callback timeout 24
tone
long, at telephone (808) 262
message indicator 107
tracking
MCID 177
tracking incoming calls, Call Log 177
trademarks 2
transfer
(also see Call Transfer) 168
activate (70) 258
Callback 174
callback timeout 24
calls 168
cancel (#70) 258
initiate (3) 260
initiating at telephone (70) 261
priority call (69) 261
ring delay 21
SWCA overview 174
to voice mailbox (986) 258
via hold, hunt groups 188
voice mail to mail box (986) 263
troubleshooting
ECAP restore issue 76
IP telephones 122
trunk answer
activating (800) 160, 259
at telephone (800) 262
Directed Pickup 159
ring groups 44
ringing services 41
U
unanswered by me, autologging 106
unanswered calls
prime telephone 186

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


294

user access, set lock 113


User preferences
configuring CAP/KIM buttons 132
user preferences
button features list 260
programming 105
user programming
contrast 154
language 155
moving lines 155
receiver volume 155
ring volume 156
user speed dials, programming 111
using features 179
call duration 176
logit 179
V
view call log (812) 262
viewing
active services (870) 259
viewing active service, prompts 205
Viking, 7406 telephone defaults 146
VLAN 120
IP telephone 121
voice call
activate (66) 259
deny (88) 259
deny at telephone (88) 263
deny, cancel (#88) 259
hunt groups 188
initiating call (66) 261
voice mail
Call Forward 171
call forward to (984) 263
display DN (985) 257, 263
feature defaults, by region 254
interrupt (987) 259, 263
intrustion controls 165
login (981) 259, 263
operator settings (982) 259
set up operator (981) 263
transfer to mailbox (986) 263
voice message
programming telephones 97
volume

N0027146
295

handset volume 21
volume of calls, call log 82
W
Wait for dial tone (804) 259, 262
wait for dial tone, external call feature 222

BCM50 Device Configuration Guide


296

N0027146

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen